Rotex RHBH04CB3V Installer's Reference Manual
Read Online
Read the Rotex RHBH04CB3V Installer's Reference Manual online using the built-in PDF viewer.
Text of the manual
Installer reference guide
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
English
+
Installer reference guide
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
RRLQ004-006-008CA
RHBH/X04+08CB
Table of contents
Installer reference guide
2
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Table of contents
1
General safety precautions
3
1.1
About the documentation ..........................................................
3
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols..............................
3
1.2
For the installer..........................................................................
4
1.2.1
General .......................................................................
4
1.2.2
Installation site ............................................................
4
1.2.3
Refrigerant ..................................................................
4
1.2.4
Brine............................................................................
5
1.2.5
Water ..........................................................................
5
1.2.6
Electrical .....................................................................
5
2
About the documentation
6
2.1
About this document..................................................................
6
2.2
Installer reference guide at a glance .........................................
6
3
About the box
7
3.1
Overview: About the box ...........................................................
7
3.2
Outdoor unit...............................................................................
7
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit .........................................
7
3.2.2
To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit.......
7
3.3
Indoor unit .................................................................................
8
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit ...........................................
8
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the indoor unit.........
8
4
About the units and options
8
4.1
Overview: About the units and options......................................
8
4.2
Identification ..............................................................................
9
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit .................................
9
4.2.2
Identification label: Indoor unit ....................................
9
4.3
Combining units and options.....................................................
9
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit...........................
9
4.3.2
Possible options for the indoor unit.............................
9
4.3.3
Possible combinations of indoor unit and outdoor
unit ..............................................................................
10
5
Application guidelines
10
5.1
Overview: Application guidelines...............................................
10
5.2
Setting up the space heating/cooling system............................
11
5.2.1
Single room.................................................................
11
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone ................................
13
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones...............................
14
5.3
Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating...............
16
5.4
Setting up the domestic hot water tank .....................................
17
5.4.1
System layout – Integrated DHW tank........................
17
5.4.2
System layout – Standalone DHW tank......................
17
5.4.3
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for
the DHW tank..............................................................
17
5.4.4
Setup and configuration – DHW tank..........................
18
5.4.5
DHW pump for instant hot water.................................
18
5.4.6
DHW pump for disinfection .........................................
19
5.5
Setting up the energy metering .................................................
19
5.5.1
Produced heat.............................................................
19
5.5.2
Consumed energy.......................................................
19
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply...................................
19
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply............................
20
5.6
Setting up the power consumption control ................................
20
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation ........................................
20
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital inputs .................
21
5.6.3
Power limitation process.............................................
21
5.7
Setting up an external temperature sensor ...............................
22
6
Preparation
22
6.1
Overview: Preparation...............................................................
22
6.2
Preparing installation site ..........................................................
22
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit ........
22
6.2.2
Additional installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit in cold climates .......................................
23
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the indoor unit ........... 23
6.3
Preparing refrigerant piping........................................................ 24
6.3.1
Refrigerant piping requirements................................... 24
6.3.2
Refrigerant piping insulation ........................................ 24
6.4
Preparing water piping ............................................................... 24
6.4.1
Water circuit requirements........................................... 24
6.4.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel pre-
pressure....................................................................... 25
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate .................... 25
6.4.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel.... 26
6.4.5
To check the water volume: Examples ........................ 27
6.5
Preparing electrical wiring .......................................................... 27
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring.................................. 27
6.5.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply................... 27
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except external
actuators ...................................................................... 28
6.5.4
Overview of electrical connections for external and
internal actuators ......................................................... 28
7
Installation
29
7.1
Overview: Installation ................................................................. 29
7.2
Opening the units ....................................................................... 29
7.2.1
About opening the units ............................................... 29
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit.............................................. 29
7.2.3
To open the indoor unit................................................ 29
7.2.4
To open the switch box cover of the indoor unit .......... 29
7.3
Mounting the outdoor unit........................................................... 29
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit.................................. 29
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit............... 29
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure............................. 30
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit............................................. 30
7.3.5
To provide drainage..................................................... 31
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling over ............... 31
7.4
Mounting the indoor unit............................................................. 32
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit.................................... 32
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the indoor unit................. 32
7.4.3
To install the indoor unit............................................... 32
7.4.4
To install the drain pan kit............................................ 33
7.5
Connecting the refrigerant piping ............................................... 33
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping ....................... 33
7.5.2
Precautions when connecting the refrigerant piping.... 33
7.5.3
Guidelines when connecting the refrigerant piping...... 33
7.5.4
Pipe bending guidelines............................................... 34
7.5.5
To flare the pipe end.................................................... 34
7.5.6
To braze the pipe end.................................................. 34
7.5.7
Using the stop valve and service port.......................... 34
7.5.8
To connect the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit ... 35
7.5.9
To connect the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit ..... 35
7.6
Checking the refrigerant piping .................................................. 35
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping .......................... 35
7.6.2
Precautions when checking the refrigerant piping ....... 36
7.6.3
To check for leaks........................................................ 36
7.6.4
To perform vacuum drying........................................... 36
7.7
Charging refrigerant ................................................................... 36
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant ........................................... 36
7.7.2
Precautions when charging refrigerant ........................ 37
7.7.3
To determine the additional refrigerant amount........... 37
7.7.4
To determine the complete recharge amount.............. 37
7.7.5
To charge additional refrigerant................................... 37
7.7.6
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases label ............. 37
7.8
Connecting the water piping....................................................... 38
7.8.1
About connecting the water piping............................... 38
7.8.2
Precautions when connecting the water piping............ 38
7.8.3
To connect the water piping......................................... 38
7.8.4
To fill the water circuit .................................................. 38
7.8.5
To fill the domestic hot water tank ............................... 38
7.8.6
To insulate the water piping......................................... 39
7.9
Connecting the electrical wiring.................................................. 39
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring.......................... 39
7.9.2
About electrical compliance ......................................... 39
1 General safety precautions
Installer reference guide
3
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring .....
39
7.9.4
Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring .......
39
7.9.5
To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor unit....
39
7.9.6
To connect the electrical wiring on the indoor unit......
40
7.9.7
To connect the main power supply .............................
40
7.9.8
To connect the backup heater power supply ..............
41
7.9.9
To connect the user interface .....................................
42
7.9.10
To connect the shut-off valve......................................
43
7.9.11
To connect the electrical meters.................................
43
7.9.12
To connect the domestic hot water pump...................
44
7.9.13
To connect the alarm output .......................................
44
7.9.14
To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF
output..........................................................................
44
7.9.15
To connect the changeover to external heat source...
44
7.9.16
To connect the power consumption digital inputs.......
44
7.9.17
To connect the safety thermostat (normal closed
contact) .......................................................................
44
7.10
Finishing the outdoor unit installation........................................
45
7.10.1
To finish the outdoor unit installation ..........................
45
7.10.2
To close the outdoor unit ............................................
45
7.11
Finishing the indoor unit installation ..........................................
45
7.11.1
To fix the user interface cover to the indoor unit.........
45
7.11.2
To close the indoor unit...............................................
45
8
Configuration
45
8.1
Overview: Configuration ............................................................
45
8.1.1
To connect the PC cable to the switch box.................
46
8.1.2
To access the most used commands .........................
46
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first to the
second user interface..................................................
47
8.1.4
To copy the language set from the first to the second
user interface ..............................................................
47
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after first power
ON...............................................................................
47
8.2
Basic configuration....................................................................
48
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date.....................
48
8.2.2
Quick wizard: Standard...............................................
48
8.2.3
Quick wizard: Options.................................................
49
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy metering) ...............
52
8.2.5
Space heating/cooling control.....................................
52
8.2.6
Domestic hot water control .........................................
55
8.2.7
Contact/helpdesk number...........................................
56
8.3
Advanced configuration/optimization.........................................
56
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation: advanced...............
56
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced........................
60
8.3.3
Heat source settings ...................................................
65
8.3.4
System settings...........................................................
67
8.4
Menu structure: Overview user settings....................................
71
8.5
Menu structure: Overview installer settings...............................
72
9
Commissioning
73
9.1
Overview: Commissioning.........................................................
73
9.2
Precautions when commissioning .............................................
73
9.3
Checklist before commissioning................................................
73
9.4
Checklist during commissioning ................................................
73
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate .................................
74
9.4.2
Air purge function........................................................
74
9.4.3
To perform a test run ..................................................
75
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run ..................................
75
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout................................
75
10 Hand-over to the user
76
11 Maintenance and service
77
11.1
Overview: Maintenance and service .........................................
77
11.2
Maintenance safety precautions................................................
77
11.2.1
Opening the indoor unit...............................................
77
11.3
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit ................
77
11.4
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the indoor unit...................
77
12 Troubleshooting
78
12.1
Overview: Troubleshooting......................................................... 78
12.2
Precautions when troubleshooting ............................................. 78
12.3
Solving problems based on symptoms....................................... 78
12.3.1
Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or cooling as
expected ...................................................................... 78
12.3.2
Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space
heating or domestic water heating).............................. 78
12.3.3
Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation) ....... 79
12.3.4
Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens.................. 79
12.3.5
Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks ......... 79
12.3.6
Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at
low outdoor temperatures ............................................ 79
12.3.7
Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is
temporarily unusually high ........................................... 80
12.3.8
Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due
to a swollen tank .......................................................... 80
12.3.9
Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT
completed correctly (AH-error)..................................... 80
12.4
Solving problems based on error codes..................................... 80
12.4.1
Error codes: Overview ................................................. 80
13 Disposal
83
13.1
Overview: Disposal..................................................................... 83
13.2
To pump down............................................................................ 83
13.3
To start and stop forced cooling................................................. 83
14 Technical data
84
14.1
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit...................................................... 84
14.2
Piping diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................ 85
14.3
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit ..................................................... 86
14.4
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................ 86
14.5
Drain pan necessity.................................................................... 90
14.6
ESP curve: Indoor unit ............................................................... 91
15 Glossary
91
16 Field settings table
92
1
General safety precautions
1.1
About the documentation
▪ The original documentation is written in English. All other
languages are translations.
▪ The precautions described in this document cover very important
topics, follow them carefully.
▪ The installation of the system, and all activities described in the
installation manual and the installer reference guide must be
performed by an authorized installer.
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols
DANGER
Indicates a situation that results in death or serious injury.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in electrocution.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Indicates a situation that could result in burning because of
extreme hot or cold temperatures.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Indicates a situation that could result in explosion.
WARNING
Indicates a situation that could result in death or serious
injury.
1 General safety precautions
Installer reference guide
4
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
WARNING: FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
CAUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or
property damage.
INFORMATION
Indicates useful tips or additional information.
Symbol
Explanation
Before installation, read the installation and
operation manual, and the wiring instruction sheet.
Before performing maintenance and service tasks,
read the service manual.
For more information, see the installer and user
reference guide.
1.2
For the installer
1.2.1
General
If you are not sure how to install or operate the unit, contact your
dealer.
NOTICE
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Only use
accessories, optional equipment and spare parts made or
approved by ROTEX.
WARNING
Make sure installation, testing and applied materials
comply with applicable legislation (on top of the
instructions described in the ROTEX documentation).
CAUTION
Wear adequate personal protective equipment (protective
gloves, safety glasses,…) when installing, maintaining or
servicing the system.
WARNING
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that
nobody, especially children, can play with them. Possible
risk: suffocation.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
▪ Do NOT touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or
internal parts during and immediately after operation. It
could be too hot or too cold. Give it time to return to
normal temperature. If you must touch it, wear
protective gloves.
▪ Do NOT touch any accidental leaking refrigerant.
WARNING
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be
used as a shelter by small animals. Small animals that
make contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions,
smoke or fire.
CAUTION
Do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT place any objects or equipment on top of the
unit.
▪ Do NOT sit, climb or stand on the unit.
NOTICE
Works executed on the outdoor unit are best done under
dry weather conditions to avoid water ingress.
In accordance with the applicable legislation, it might be necessary
to provide a logbook with the product containing at least: information
on maintenance, repair work, results of tests, stand-by periods,…
Also, at least, following information must be provided at an
accessible place at the product:
▪ Instructions for shutting down the system in case of an emergency
▪ Name and address of fire department, police and hospital
▪ Name, address and day and night telephone numbers for
obtaining service
In Europe, EN378 provides the necessary guidance for this logbook.
1.2.2
Installation site
▪ Provide sufficient space around the unit for servicing and air
circulation.
▪ Make sure the installation site withstands the unit's weight and
vibration.
▪ Make sure the area is well ventilated. Do NOT block any
ventilation openings.
▪ Make sure the unit is level.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ In potentially explosive atmospheres.
▪ In places where there is machinery that emits electromagnetic
waves. Electromagnetic waves may disturb the control system,
and cause malfunction of the equipment.
▪ In places where there is a risk of fire due to the leakage of
flammable gases (example: thinner or gasoline), carbon fibre,
ignitable dust.
▪ In places where corrosive gas (example: sulphurous acid gas) is
produced. Corrosion of copper pipes or soldered parts may cause
the refrigerant to leak.
1.2.3
Refrigerant
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
NOTICE
Make sure refrigerant piping installation complies with
applicable legislation. In Europe, EN378 is the applicable
standard.
NOTICE
Make sure the field piping and connections are not
subjected to stress.
WARNING
During tests, NEVER pressurize the product with a
pressure higher than the maximum allowable pressure (as
indicated on the nameplate of the unit).
1 General safety precautions
Installer reference guide
5
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of refrigerant leakage. If
refrigerant gas leaks, ventilate the area immediately.
Possible risks:
▪ Excessive refrigerant concentrations in a closed room
can lead to oxygen deficiency.
▪ Toxic gas may be produced if refrigerant gas comes
into contact with fire.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
WARNING
Always recover the refrigerant. Do NOT release them
directly into the environment. Use a vacuum pump to
evacuate the installation.
NOTICE
After all the piping has been connected, make sure there is
no gas leak. Use nitrogen to perform a gas leak detection.
NOTICE
▪ To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
▪ When the refrigerant system is to be opened,
refrigerant must be treated according to the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
Make sure there is no oxygen in the system. Refrigerant
may only be charged after performing the leak test and the
vacuum drying.
▪ In case re-charge is required, refer to the nameplate of the unit. It
states the type of refrigerant and necessary amount.
▪ The unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe
sizes and pipe lengths some systems require additional charging
of refrigerant.
▪ Only use tools exclusively for the refrigerant type used in the
system, this to ensure pressure resistance and prevent foreign
materials from entering into the system.
▪ Charge the liquid refrigerant as follows:
If
Then
A siphon tube is present
(i.e., the cylinder is marked with
"Liquid filling siphon attached")
Charge with the cylinder upright.
A siphon tube is NOT present
Charge with the cylinder upside
down.
▪ Open refrigerant cylinders slowly.
▪ Charge the refrigerant in liquid form. Adding it in gas form may
prevent normal operation.
CAUTION
When the refrigerant charging procedure is done or when
pausing,
close
the
valve
of
the
refrigerant
tank
immediately. If the valve is not closed immediately,
remaining pressure might charge additional refrigerant.
Possible consequence: Incorrect refrigerant amount.
1.2.4
Brine
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
WARNING
The selection of the brine MUST be in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of brine leakage. If
brine leaks, ventilate the area immediately and contact
your local dealer.
WARNING
The ambient temperature inside the unit can get much
higher than that of the room, e.g. 70°C. In case of a brine
leak, hot parts inside the unit can create a hazardous
situation.
WARNING
The use and installation of the application MUST comply
with the safety and environmental precautions specified in
the applicable legislation.
1.2.5
Water
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
NOTICE
Make sure water quality complies with EU directive
98/83 EC.
1.2.6
Electrical
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Turn OFF all power supply before removing the
switch box cover, connecting electrical wiring or
touching electrical parts.
▪ Disconnect the power supply for more than 1 minute,
and measure the voltage at the terminals of main circuit
capacitors or electrical components before servicing.
The voltage MUST be less than 50 V DC before you
can touch electrical components. For the location of the
terminals, see the wiring diagram.
▪ Do NOT touch electrical components with wet hands.
▪ Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service
cover is removed.
WARNING
If NOT factory installed, a main switch or other means for
disconnection, having a contact separation in all poles
providing full disconnection under overvoltage category III
condition, MUST be installed in the fixed wiring.
2 About the documentation
Installer reference guide
6
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
WARNING
▪ ONLY use copper wires.
▪ Make sure the field wiring complies with the applicable
legislation.
▪ All field wiring must be performed in accordance with
the wiring diagram supplied with the product.
▪ NEVER squeeze bundled cables and make sure they
do not come in contact with the piping and sharp
edges. Make sure no external pressure is applied to the
terminal connections.
▪ Make sure to install earth wiring. Do NOT earth the unit
to a utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock.
▪ Make sure to use a dedicated power circuit. NEVER
use a power supply shared by another appliance.
▪ Make sure to install the required fuses or circuit
breakers.
▪ Make sure to install an earth leakage protector. Failure
to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
▪ When installing the earth leakage protector, make sure
it is compatible with the inverter (resistant to high
frequency electric noise) to avoid unnecessary opening
of the earth leakage protector.
NOTICE
Precautions when laying power wiring:
▪ Do not connect wiring of different thicknesses to the
power terminal block (slack in the power wiring may
cause abnormal heat).
▪ When connecting wiring which is the same thickness,
do as shown in the figure below.
▪ For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect
firmly, then secure to prevent outside pressure being
exerted on the terminal board.
▪ Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the
terminal screws. A screwdriver with a small head will
damage the head and make proper tightening
impossible.
▪ Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.
Install power cables at least 1 metre away from televisions or radios
to prevent interference. Depending on the radio waves, a distance of
1 metre may not be sufficient.
WARNING
▪ After finishing the electrical work, confirm that each
electrical component and terminal inside the electrical
components box is connected securely.
▪ Make sure all covers are closed before starting up the
unit.
NOTICE
Only applicable if the power supply is three‑phase, and the
compressor has an ON/OFF starting method.
If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after a
momentary black out and the power goes on and off while
the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally. Running the product in reversed
phase can break the compressor and other parts.
2
About the documentation
2.1
About this document
Target audience
Authorised installers
Documentation set
This document is part of a documentation set. The complete set
consists of:
▪ General safety precautions:
▪ Safety instructions that you must read before installing
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Indoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Outdoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Installer reference guide:
▪ Preparation of the installation, good practices, reference data,…
▪ Format: Digital files on the ROTEX homepage
▪ Addendum book for optional equipment:
▪ Additional info about how to install optional equipment
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit) + Digital files on
the ROTEX homepage
Latest revisions of the supplied documentation may be available on
the regional ROTEX website or via your dealer.
The original documentation is written in English. All other languages
are translations.
2.2
Installer reference guide at a
glance
Chapter
Description
General safety
precautions
Safety instructions that you must read
before installing
About the documentation
What documentation exists for the
installer
About the box
How to unpack the units and remove
their accessories
About the units and
options
▪ How to identify the units
▪ Possible combinations of units and
options
Application guidelines
Various installation setups of the system
Preparation
What to do and know before going
on‑site
Installation
What to do and know to install the
system
Configuration
What to do and know to configure the
system after it is installed
Commissioning
What to do and know to commission the
system after it is configured
Hand‑over to the user
What to give and explain to the user
Maintenance and service
How to maintain and service the units
Troubleshooting
What to do in case of problems
Disposal
How to dispose of the system
3 About the box
Installer reference guide
7
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Chapter
Description
Technical data
Specifications of the system
Glossary
Definition of terms
Field settings table
Table to be filled in by the installer, and
kept for future reference
Note: There is also an installer settings
table in the user reference guide. This
table has to be filled in by the installer
and handed over to the user.
3
About the box
3.1
Overview: About the box
This chapter describes what you have to do after the boxes with the
outdoor and indoor unit are delivered on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Unpacking and handling the units
▪ Removing the accessories from the units
Keep the following in mind:
▪ At delivery, the unit must be checked for damage. Any damage
must be reported immediately to the carrier's claims agent.
▪ Bring the packed unit as close as possible to its final installation
position to prevent damage during transport.
3.2
Outdoor unit
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit
1
2
3.2.2
To remove the accessories from the
outdoor unit
1
Lift the outdoor unit.
CAUTION
Only handle the outdoor unit as follows:
57kg
2
Remove the accessories at the bottom of the package.
a
d
b
c
1×
1×
1×
2×
a
Outdoor unit installation manual
b
Fluorinated greenhouse gases label
c
Multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label
d
Unit mounting plate
4 About the units and options
Installer reference guide
8
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
3.3
Indoor unit
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit
a
a
a
General safety precautions, indoor unit installation manual,
operation manual and addendum book for optional
equipment
INFORMATION
Do NOT throw away the upper cardboard cover. On the
outside of the cardboard cover, the installation pattern is
printed.
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the
indoor unit
The general safety precautions, the indoor unit installation manual,
the operation manual and the addendum book for optional
equipment are located in the upper part of the box. Follow the
procedure below to remove the other accessories.
1
Remove the tape.
2×
2
Tilt the bottom side of the front panel upwards and remove it.
3
Remove the accessories.
g
e+f
h
2×
1×
1×
1×
1×
1×
1×
a
b
c
d
f
2×
e
g
h
a
General safety precautions
b
Addendum book for optional equipment
c
Indoor unit installation manual
d
Operation manual
e
Sealing ring for shut-off valve
f
Shut-off valve
g
User interface cover
h
Top plate of indoor unit
4
About the units and options
4.1
Overview: About the units and
options
This chapter contains information about:
4 About the units and options
Installer reference guide
9
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ Identifying the outdoor unit
▪ Identifying the indoor unit
▪ Combining outdoor and indoor units
▪ Combining the outdoor unit with options
▪ Combining the indoor unit with options
4.2
Identification
NOTICE
When installing or servicing several units at the same time,
make sure NOT to switch the service panels between
different models.
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit
Location
Model identification
Example: RR L Q 006 CA V3
Code
Explanation
RR
Split outdoor pair heat pump
L
Low water temperature – ambient zone: −10~
−20°C
Q
Refrigerant R410A
006
Capacity class
CA
Model series
V3
Power supply
4.2.2
Identification label: Indoor unit
Location
Model identification
Example: R HB H 04 CB 3V
Code
Description
R
ROTEX model
HB
Wall-mounted indoor unit
H
H=Heating only
X=Heating/cooling
04
Capacity class
Code
Description
CB
Model series
3V
Backup heater model
4.3
Combining units and options
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit
Drain pan (EKDP008CA)
The drain pan is required to gather the drain from the outdoor unit.
The drain pan kit consists of:
▪ Drain pan
▪ Installation brackets
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan.
Drain pan heater (EKDPH008CA)
The drain pan heater is required to avoid freezing-up of the drain
pan.
It is recommended to install this option in colder regions with
possible low ambient temperatures or heavy snowfall.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan heater.
INFORMATION
In case the drain pan heater is used, the jumper JP_DP on
the service PCB on the outdoor unit MUST be cut.
After cutting the jumper, you MUST reset the outdoor unit
to activate this function.
U-beams (EKFT008CA)
The U-beams are installation brackets on which the outdoor unit can
be installed.
It is recommended to install this option in colder regions with
possible low ambient temperatures or heavy snowfall.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
outdoor unit.
4.3.2
Possible options for the indoor unit
User interface (RKRUCBL*)
The user interface and a possible additional user interface are
available as an option.
The additional user interface can be connected:
▪ To have both:
▪ control close to the indoor unit,
▪ room thermostat functionality in the principal space to be
heated.
▪ To have an interface containing other languages.
Following user interfaces are available:
▪ RKRUCBL1 contains following languages: German, French,
Dutch, Italian.
▪ RKRUCBL2 contains following languages: English, Swedish,
Norwegian, Finnish.
▪ RKRUCBL3 contains following languages: English, Spanish,
Greek, Portuguese.
▪ RKRUCBL4 contains following languages: English, Turkish,
Polish, Romanian.
▪ RKRUCBL5 contains following languages: German, Czech,
Slovenian, Slovakian.
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
10
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ RKRUCBL6 contains following languages: English, Croatian,
Hungarian, Estonian.
▪ RKRUCBL7 contains following languages: English, German,
Russian, Danish.
Languages on the user interface can be uploaded by PC software or
copied from an user interface to the other.
For installation instructions, see "7.9.9 To connect the user
interface" on page 42.
Room thermostat (RKRTWA, RKRTR1, RTRNETA)
You can connect an optional room thermostat to the indoor unit. This
thermostat can either be wired (RKRTWA) or wireless (RKRTR1 and
RTRNETA). Thermostat RTRNETA can only be used in heating-only
systems.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote sensor for wireless thermostat (EKRTETS)
You can use a wireless indoor temperature sensor (EKRTETS) only
in combination with the wireless thermostat (RKRTR1).
For installation intructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Digital I/O PCB (EKRP1HB)
The digital I/O PCB is required to provide following signals:
▪ Alarm output
▪ Space heating/cooling On/OFF output
▪ Changeover to external heat source
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the digital
I/O PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
Demand PCB (EKRP1AHTA)
To enable the power saving consumption control by digital inputs
you must install the demand PCB.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
demand PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote outdoor sensor (EKRSCA1)
By default the sensor inside the outdoor unit will be used to measure
the outdoor temperature.
As an option the remote outdoor sensor can be installed to measure
the outdoor temperature on another location (e.g. to avoid direct
sunlight) to have an improved system behaviour.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
outdoor sensor.
PC configurator (EKPCCAB)
The PC cable makes a connection between the switch box of the
indoor unit and a PC. It gives the possibility to upload different
language files to the user interface and indoor parameters to the
indoor unit. For the available language files, contact your local
dealer.
The software and corresponding operating instructions are available
on the ROTEX homepage.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the PC
cable and "8 Configuration" on page 45.
Heat pump convector (RFWXV)
For providing space heating/cooling, it is possible to use heat pump
convectors (RFWXV).
For installation instructions, refer to the installation manual of the
heat pump convectors, and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
Drain pan kit (EKHBDPCA2)
The drain pan is required to drain accumulated condensation from
the indoor unit. It is required during low temperature cooling
operation of the indoor unit and when the leaving water temperature
is <18°C.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan kit.
Domestic hot water tank
The domestic hot water tank can be connected to the indoor unit for
providing domestic hot water.
LAN adapter for smartphone control + Smart Grid applications
(BRP069A61)
You can install this LAN adapter to:
▪ Control the system via a smartphone app.
▪ Use the system in various Smart Grid applications.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
LAN adapter for smartphone control (BRP069A62)
You can install this LAN adapter to control the system via a
smartphone app.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
4.3.3
Possible combinations of indoor unit and outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
RRLQ004CAV3
RRLQ006CAV3
RRLQ008CAV3
RHBH04CB3V
O
—
—
RHBX04CB3V
O
—
—
RHBH08CB3V
—
O
O
RHBX08CB3V
—
O
O
RHBH08CB9W
—
O
O
RHBX08CB9W
—
O
O
5
Application guidelines
5.1
Overview: Application guidelines
The purpose of the application guidelines is to give a glance of the
possibilities of the ROTEX heat pump system.
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
11
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
NOTICE
▪ The illustrations in the application guidelines are meant
for reference only, and are NOT to be used as detailed
hydraulic
diagrams.
The
detailed
hydraulic
dimensioning and balancing are NOT shown, and are
the responsibility of the installer.
▪ For more information about the configuration settings to
optimize heat pump operation, see "8 Configuration" on
page 45.
This chapter contains application guidelines for:
▪ Setting up the space heating/cooling system
▪ Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating
▪ Setting up the domestic hot water tank
▪ Setting up the energy metering
▪ Setting up the power consumption
▪ Setting up an external temperature sensor
5.2
Setting up the space heating/
cooling system
The heat pump system supplies leaving water to heat emitters in one
or more rooms.
Because the system offers a wide flexibility to control the
temperature in each room, you need to answer the following
questions first:
▪ How many rooms are heated or cooled by the ROTEX heat pump
system?
▪ Which heat emitter types are used in each room and what is their
design leaving water temperature?
Once the space heating/cooling requirements are clear, ROTEX
recommends to follow the setup guidelines below.
NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
INFORMATION
In case an external room thermostat is used and room frost
protection needs to be guaranteed in all conditions, then
you have to set auto emergency [A.6.C] to 1.
5.2.1
Single room
Under floor heating or radiators – Wired room
thermostat
Setup
B
A
a
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
One single room
a
User interface used as room thermostat
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
indoor unit.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which is
used as room thermostat. Possible installations:
▪ User interface installed in the room and used as room
thermostat
▪ User interface installed at the indoor unit and used for control
close to the indoor unit + user interface installed in the room
and used as room thermostat
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Benefits
▪ Cost effective. You do NOT need an additional external room
thermostat.
▪ Highest comfort and efficiency. The smart room thermostat
functionality can decrease or increase the desired leaving water
temperature based on the actual room temperature (modulation).
This results in:
▪ Stable room temperature matching the desired temperature
(higher comfort)
▪ Less ON/OFF cycles (more quiet, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ Lowest possible leaving water temperature (higher efficiency)
▪ Easy. You can easily set the desired room temperature via the
user interface:
▪ For your daily needs, you can use preset values and schedules.
▪ To deviate from your daily needs, you can temporarily overrule
the preset values and schedules, use the holiday mode…
Under floor heating or radiators – Wireless room
thermostat
Setup
B
A
b
a
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
One single room
a
Receiver for wireless external room thermostat
b
Wireless external room thermostat
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
indoor unit.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the wireless external room
thermostat (optional equipment RKRTR1).
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
12
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
External room thermostat for the
main zone:
▪ #: [A.2.2.4]
▪ Code: [C-05]
1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
send a thermo ON/OFF
condition.
Benefits
▪ Wireless. The ROTEX external room thermostat is available in a
wireless version.
▪ Efficiency. Although the external room thermostat only sends ON/
OFF signals, it is specifically designed for the heat pump system.
▪ Comfort. In case of under floor heating, the wireless external
room thermostat prevents condensation on the floor during cooling
operation by measuring the room humidity.
Heat pump convectors
Setup
B
A
a
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
One single room
a
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on the indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4).
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on the indoor unit (X2M/32 and X2M/33).
INFORMATION
When using multiple heat pump convectors, make sure
each one receives the infrared signal from the remote
controller of the heat pump convectors.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
Setting
Value
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
External room thermostat for the
main zone:
▪ #: [A.2.2.4]
▪ Code: [C-05]
1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
send a thermo ON/OFF
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
Benefits
▪ Cooling. The heat pump convector offers, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Optimal energy efficiency because of the interlink
function.
▪ Stylish.
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Space heating is provided by:
▪ The under floor heating
▪ The heat pump convectors
▪ Space cooling is provided by the heat pump convectors only. The
under floor heating is shut off by the shut-off valve.
Setup
B
A
a
M1
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
One single room
a
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ A shut-off valve (field supply) is installed before the under floor
heating to prevent condensation on the floor during cooling
operation.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on the indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4)
▪ The space operation mode is sent by one digital output (X2M/32
and X2M/33) on the indoor unit to:
▪ The heat pump convectors
▪ The shut-off valve
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
13
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Setting
Value
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
External room thermostat for the
main zone:
▪ #: [A.2.2.4]
▪ Code: [C-05]
1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
send a thermo ON/OFF
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
Benefits
▪ Cooling. Heat pump convectors provide, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Under floor heating has the best performance with
ROTEX HPSU.
▪ Comfort. The combination of the two heat emitter types provides:
▪ The excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating
▪ The excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone
If only one leaving water temperature zone is needed because the
design leaving water temperature of all heat emitters is the same,
you do NOT need a mixing valve station (cost effective).
Example: If the heat pump system is used to heat up one floor
where all the rooms have the same heat emitters.
Under floor heating or radiators – Thermostatic
valves
If you are heating up rooms with under floor heating or radiators, a
very common way is to control the temperature of the main room by
using a thermostat (this can either be the user interface or an
external room thermostat), while the other rooms are controlled by
so-called thermostatic valves, which open or close depending on the
room temperature.
Setup
T
B
C
A
a
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
Room 1
C
Room 2
a
User interface
▪ The under floor heating of the main room is directly connected to
the indoor unit.
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as thermostat.
▪ A thermostatic valve is installed before the under floor heating in
each of the other rooms.
INFORMATION
Mind situations where the main room can be heated by
another heating source. Example: Fireplaces.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Benefits
▪ Cost effective.
▪ Easy. Same installation as for one room, but with thermostatic
valves.
Under floor heating or radiators – Multiple external
room thermostats
Setup
M2
M1
B
C
A
a
a
b
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
Room 1
C
Room 2
a
External room thermostat
b
Bypass valve
▪ For each room, a shut-off valve (field supplied) is installed to avoid
leaving water supply when there is no heating or cooling demand.
▪ A bypass valve must be installed to make water recirculation
possible when all shut-off valves are closed. To guarantee reliable
operation, provide a minimum water flow as described in table "To
check the water volume and flow rate" in "6.4 Preparing water
piping" on page 24.
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each room
thermostat must be set to match the indoor unit.
▪ The room thermostats are connected to the shut-off valves, but do
NOT have to be connected to the indoor unit. The indoor unit will
supply leaving water all the time, with the possibility to program a
leaving water schedule.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Benefits
Compared with under floor heating or radiators for one room:
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
14
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the room thermostats.
Heat pump convectors - Multiple rooms
Setup
B
A
a
a
C
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
Room 1
C
Room 2
a
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode.
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4). The indoor unit will only supply
leaving water temperature when there is an actual demand.
INFORMATION
To
increase
comfort
and
performance,
ROTEX
recommends to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on
each heat pump convector.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Benefits
Compared with heat pump convectors for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the remote controller of the
heat pump convectors.
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
Setup
b
B
C
A
a
M1
M1
A
Main leaving water temperature zone
B
Room 1
C
Room 2
a
External room thermostat
b
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The heat pump
convectors are directly connected to the indoor unit.
▪ For each room with under floor heating: Two shut-off valves (field
supply) are installed before the under floor heating:
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent hot water supply when the room has
no heating demand
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent condensation on the floor during
cooling operation of the rooms with heat pump convectors.
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The desired room
temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
▪ For each room with under floor heating: The desired room
temperature is set via the external room thermostat (wired or
wireless).
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each external
room thermostat and remote controller of the heat pump
convectors must be set to match the indoor unit.
INFORMATION
To
increase
comfort
and
performance,
ROTEX
recommends to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on
each heat pump convector.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones
If the heat emitters selected for each room are designed for different
leaving water temperatures, you can use different leaving water
temperature zones (maximum 2).
In this document:
▪ Main zone = Zone with the lowest design temperature in heating,
and the highest design temperature in cooling
▪ Additional zone = The other zone
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
15
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
CAUTION
When there is more than one leaving water zone, you must
ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in the main zone to
decrease (in heating)/increase (in cooling) the leaving
water temperature when the additional zone has demand.
Typical example:
Room (zone)
Heat emitters: Design
temperature
Living room (main zone)
Under floor heating:
▪ In heating: 35°C
▪ In
cooling:
20°C
(only
refreshment, no real cooling
allowed)
Bed rooms (additional zone)
Heat pump convectors:
▪ In heating: 45°C
▪ In cooling: 12°C
Setup
B
A
a
a
C
E
D
b
c
d
A
Additional leaving water temperature zone
B
Room 1
C
Room 2
D
Main leaving water temperature zone
E
Room 3
a
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
b
User interface
c
Mixing valve station
d
Pressure regulating valve
INFORMATION
A pressure regulating valve should be implemented before
the mixing valve station. This is to guarantee the correct
water flow balance between the main leaving water
temperature zone and the additional leaving water
temperature zone in relation to the required capacity of
both water temperature zones.
▪ For the main zone:
▪ A mixing valve station is installed before the under floor heating.
▪ The pump of the mixing valve station is controlled by the ON/
OFF signal on the indoor unit (X2M/5 and X2M/7; normal closed
shut-off valve output).
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which
is used as room thermostat.
▪ For the additional zone:
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors for each room.
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4). The indoor unit will only supply
the desired additional leaving water temperature when there is
an actual demand.
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each remote
controller of the heat pump convectors must be set to match the
indoor unit.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Note:
▪ Main room = user interface
used
as
room
thermostat
functionality
▪ Other rooms = external room
thermostat functionality
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
1 (2 LWT zones): Main +
additional
In case of heat pump convectors:
External room thermostat for the
additional zone:
▪ #: [A.2.2.5]
▪ Code: [C-06]
1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
send a thermo ON/OFF
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
Shut-off valve output
Set to follow the thermo demand
of the main zone.
Shut-off valve
If the main zone must be shut off
during cooling mode to prevent
condensation on the floor, set it
accordingly.
At the mixing valve station
Set the desired main leaving
water temperature for heating
and/or cooling.
Benefits
▪ Comfort.
▪ The smart room thermostat functionality can decrease or
increase the desired leaving water temperature based on the
actual room temperature (modulation).
▪ The combination of the two heat emitter systems provides the
excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating, and the
excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors.
▪ Efficiency.
▪ Depending on the demand, the indoor unit supplies different
leaving water temperature matching the design temperature of
the different heat emitters.
▪ Under floor heating has the best performance with ROTEX
HPSU.
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
16
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
5.3
Setting up an auxiliary heat source
for space heating
▪ Space heating can be done by:
▪ The indoor unit
▪ An auxiliary boiler (field supply) connected to the system
▪ When the room thermostat requests heating, the indoor unit or the
auxiliary boiler starts operating depending on the outdoor
temperature (status of the changeover to external heat source).
When the permission is given to the auxiliary boiler, the space
heating by the indoor unit is turned OFF.
▪ Bivalent operation is only possible for space heating, NOT for
domestic hot water production. Domestic hot water is always
produced by the DHW tank connected to the indoor unit.
INFORMATION
▪ During heating operation of the heat pump, the
heat
pump
operates
to
achieve
the
desired
temperature set via the user interface. When weather-
dependent operation is active, the water temperature is
determined automatically depending on the outdoor
temperature.
▪ During heating operation of the auxiliary boiler, the
auxiliary boiler operates to achieve the desired water
temperature set via the auxiliary boiler controller.
Setup
▪ Integrate the auxiliary boiler as follows:
Only for RHBH/X
a
b c
d
e
f
g
h
j
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
M
h
i
i
l
k
f
m
n
Only for RHVH/X
a
b c d e
f
f
g
h
j
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
M
h
i
i
l
k
m
n
a
Outdoor unit
b
Indoor unit
c
Heat exchanger
d
Backup heater
e
Pump
f
Shut-off valve
g
Motorised 3‑way valve (delivered with DHW tank)
h
Non-return valve (field supply)
i
Shut-off valve (field supply)
j
Collector (field supply)
k
Auxiliary boiler (field supply)
l
Aquastat valve (field supply)
m
DHW tank (RHBH/X: option)
n
Heat exchanger coil
FHL1...3
Under floor heating
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary boiler and its integration in the
system complies with applicable legislation.
▪ ROTEX is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe
situations in the auxiliary boiler system.
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
17
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ Make sure the return water to the heat pump does NOT exceed
55°C. To do so:
▪ Set the desired water temperature via the auxiliary boiler
controller to maximum 55°C.
▪ Install an aquastat valve in the return water flow of the
heat pump.
▪ Set the aquastat valve to close above 55°C and to open below
55°C.
▪ Install non-return valves.
▪ Make sure to only have one expansion vessel in the water circuit.
An expansion vessel is already premounted in the indoor unit.
▪ Install the digital I/O PCB (option EKRP1HB).
▪ Connect X1 and X2 (changeover to external heat source) on the
PCB to the auxiliary boiler thermostat.
▪ To setup the heat emitters, see "5.2 Setting up the space heating/
cooling system" on page 11.
Configuration
Via the user interface (quick wizard):
▪ Set the use of a bivalent system as external heat source.
▪ Set the bivalent temperature and hysteresis.
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the bivalent hysteresis has enough
differential to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ Because the outdoor temperature is measured by the
outdoor unit air thermistor, install the outdoor unit in the
shadow so that it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF
by direct sunlight.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
Changeover to external heat source decided by an auxiliary
contact
▪ Only possible in external room thermostat control AND one
leaving water temperature zone (see "5.2 Setting up the space
heating/cooling system" on page 11).
▪ The auxiliary contact can be:
▪ An outdoor temperature thermostat
▪ An electricity tariff contact
▪ A manually operated contact
▪ …
▪ Setup: Connect the following field wiring:
L
N
H
Com
A
K2A
K1A
X2M
BTI
K2A
K1A
Indoor/Auto/Boiler
1 2 3 4
X Y
Indoor
BTI
Boiler thermostat input
A
Auxiliary contact (normal closed)
H
Heating demand room thermostat (optional)
K1A
Auxiliary relay for activation of indoor unit (field supply)
K2A
Auxiliary relay for activation of boiler (field supply)
Indoor
Indoor unit
Auto
Automatic
Boiler
Boiler
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary contact has enough differential
or time delay to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ If the auxiliary contact is an outdoor temperature
thermostat, install the thermostat in the shadow so that
it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF by direct
sunlight.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
5.4
Setting up the domestic hot water
tank
5.4.1
System layout – Integrated DHW tank
Only for RHVH/X.
a
Outdoor unit
b
Indoor unit
c
Heat exchanger
d
Backup heater
e
Pump
f
Motorised 3‑way valve
g
DHW tank
h
Shut-off valve
i
Collector (field supply)
FHL1...3
Under floor heating
UI
User interface
5.4.2
System layout – Standalone DHW tank
Only for RHBH/X.
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
M
a
b c
d
e
h
f
g
f
i
j
a
Outdoor unit
b
Indoor unit
c
Heat exchanger
d
Backup heater
e
Pump
f
Shut-off valve
g
Motorised 3‑way valve
h
Collector (field supply)
i
DHW tank
j
Heat exchanger coil
FHL1...3
Under floor heating
5.4.3
Selecting the volume and desired
temperature for the DHW tank
People experience water as hot when its temperature is 40°C.
Therefore, the DHW consumption is always expressed as equivalent
hot water volume at 40°C. However, you can set the DHW tank
temperature at a higher temperature (example: 53°C), which is then
mixed with cold water (example: 15°C).
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
18
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank
consists of:
1
Determining the DHW consumption (equivalent hot water
volume at 40°C).
2
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank.
Possible DHW tank volumes
Depending on the available options, tanks with the following volumes
are available:
Type
Possible volumes
Standalone DHW tank
▪ 150 l
▪ 200 l
▪ 300 l
▪ 500 l
Energy saving tips
▪ If the DHW consumption differs from day to day, you can program
a weekly schedule with different desired DHW tank temperatures
for each day.
▪ The lower the desired DHW tank temperature, the more cost
effective. By selecting a larger DHW tank, you can lower the
desired DHW tank temperature.
▪ The heat pump itself can produce domestic hot water of maximum
55°C (50°C if outdoor temperature is low). The electrical
resistance integrated in the heat pump can increase this
temperature. However, this consumes more energy. ROTEX
recommends to set the desired DHW tank temperature below
55°C to avoid using the electrical resistance.
▪ The higher the outdoor temperature, the better the performance of
the heat pump.
▪ If energy prices are the same during the day and the night,
ROTEX recommends to heat up the DHW tank during the day.
▪ If energy prices are lower during the night, ROTEX
recommends to heat up the DHW tank during the night.
▪ When the heat pump produces domestic hot water, it cannot heat
up a space. When you need domestic hot water and space
heating at the same, ROTEX recommends to produce the
domestic hot water during the night when there is lower space
heating demand.
Determining the DHW consumption
Answer the following questions and calculate the DHW consumption
(equivalent hot water volume at 40°C) using the typical water
volumes:
Question
Typical water volume
How many showers are needed
per day?
1 shower = 10 min×10 l/min =
100 l
How many baths are needed per
day?
1 bath = 150 l
How much water is needed at the
kitchen sink per day?
1 sink = 2 min×5 l/min = 10 l
Are there any other domestic hot
water needs?
—
Example: If the DHW consumption of a family (4 persons) per day is
as follows:
▪ 3 showers
▪ 1 bath
▪ 3 sink volumes
Then the DHW consumption = (3×100 l)+(1×150 l)+(3×10 l)=480 l
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank
Formula
Example
V1=V2+V2×(T2−40)/(40−T1)
If:
▪ V2=180 l
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V1=280 l
V2=V1×(40−T1)/(T2−T1)
If:
▪ V1=480 l
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V2=307 l
V1
DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C)
V2
Required DHW tank volume if only heated once
T2
DHW tank temperature
T1
Cold water temperature
5.4.4
Setup and configuration – DHW tank
▪ For large DHW consumptions, you can heat up the DHW tank
several times during the day.
▪ To heat up the DHW tank to the desired DHW tank temperature,
you can use the following energy sources:
▪ Thermodynamic cycle of the heat pump
▪ Electrical backup heater (for integrated DHW tank)
▪ Electrical booster heater (for standalone DHW tank)
▪ For more information about:
▪ Optimizing the energy consumption for producing domestic hot
water, see "8 Configuration" on page 45.
▪ Connecting the electrical wiring of the standalone DHW tank to
the indoor unit, see the installation manual of the DHW tank.
▪ Connecting the water piping of the standalone DHW tank to the
indoor unit, see the installation manual of the DHW tank.
5.4.5
DHW pump for instant hot water
Setup
c
f
a
b
g
h
i
a
Indoor unit
b
DHW tank
c
DHW pump (field supply)
f
Shower (field supply)
g
Cold water
h
Domestic hot water OUT
i
Recirculation connection
▪ By connecting a DHW pump, instant hot water can be available at
the tap.
▪ The DHW pump and the installation are field supply and the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ For
more
information
about
connecting
the
recirculation
connection:
▪ for integrated DHW tank, see "7 Installation" on page 29,
▪ for separate DHW tank, see installation manual of DHW tank.
Configuration
▪ For more information, see "8 Configuration" on page 45.
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
19
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ You can program a schedule to control the DHW pump via the
user interface. For more information, see the user reference
guide.
5.4.6
DHW pump for disinfection
Setup
c
a
b
d
f
e
g
h
i
a
Indoor unit
b
DHW tank
c
DHW pump (field supply)
d
Heater element (field supply)
e
Non‑return valve (field supply)
f
Shower (field supply)
g
Cold water
h
Domestic hot water OUT
i
Recirculation connection
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ For the integrated DHW tank, the temperature of the DHW tank
can be set to maximum 60°C. If applicable legislation requires
higher temperature for disinfection, you can connect a DHW pump
and heater element as shown above.
▪ If applicable legislation requires disinfection of the water piping
until the tapping point, you can connect a DHW pump and heater
element (if needed) as shown above.
Configuration
The indoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more
information, see "8 Configuration" on page 45.
5.5
Setting up the energy metering
▪ Via the user interface, you can read out the following energy data:
▪ Produced heat
▪ Consumed energy
▪ You can read out the energy data:
▪ For space heating
▪ For space cooling
▪ For domestic hot water production
▪ You can read out the energy data:
▪ Per month
▪ Per year
INFORMATION
The calculated produced heat and consumed energy are
an estimation, the accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
5.5.1
Produced heat
INFORMATION
The sensors used to calculate the produced heat are
calibrated automatically.
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ The produced heat is calculated internally based on:
▪ The leaving and entering water temperature
▪ The flow rate
▪ The power consumption of the booster heater (if applicable) in
the domestic hot water tank
▪ Setup and configuration:
▪ No additional equipment needed.
▪ Only in case a booster heater is present in the system, measure
its capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface. Example: If you measure a booster heater
resistance of 17.1Ω, the capacity of the heater at 230 V is
3100 W.
5.5.2
Consumed energy
You can use the following methods to determine the consumed
energy:
▪ Calculating
▪ Measuring
INFORMATION
You cannot combine calculating the consumed energy
(example:
for
backup
heater)
and
measuring
the
consumed energy (example: for outdoor unit). If you do so,
the energy data will be invalid.
Calculating the consumed energy
▪ Only applicable for RHBH/X04+08 and RHVH/X04+08.
▪ The consumed energy is calculated internally based on:
▪ The actual power input of the outdoor unit
▪ The set capacity of the backup heater and booster heater
▪ The voltage
▪ Setup and configuration: To get accurate energy data, measure
the capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface for:
▪ The backup heater (step 1 and step 2)
▪ The booster heater
Measuring the consumed energy
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ Preferred method because of higher accuracy.
▪ Requires external power meters.
▪ Setup and configuration: When using electrical power meters, set
the number of pulses/kWh for each power meter via the user
interface. Consumed energy data for RHVH/X11+16 and RHBH/
X11+16 models will only be available if this setting is configured.
INFORMATION
When measuring the electrical power consumption, make
sure ALL power input of the system is covered by the
electrical power meters.
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply
General rule
One power meter that covers the entire system is sufficient.
Setup
Connect the power meter to X5M/7 and X5M/8.
Power meter type
In case of…
Use a… power meter
▪ Single-phase outdoor unit
▪ Backup heater supplied from a
single-phase
grid
(i.e.
the
backup heater model is *3V or
*9W connected to a single-
phase grid)
Single-phase
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
20
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
In case of…
Use a… power meter
In other cases (i.e. a three-phase
outdoor unit and/or a *9W
backup heater model connected
to a three-phase grid)
Three-phase
Example
Single-phase power meter
Three-phase power meter
b
0580 1 50
0
c
c
f
e
d
g
A
B
C
a
A Outdoor unit
B Indoor unit
C DHW tank
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N)
b Power meter (L1/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
d Outdoor unit (L1/N)
e Indoor unit (L1/N)
f Backup heater (L1/N)
g Booster heater (L1/N)
b
0580 1 50
0
g
f
e
h
A
B
C
c
c
d
a
A Outdoor unit
B Indoor unit
C DHW tank
a Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N)
b Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
c Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
d Fuse (L1/N)
e Outdoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
f Indoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
g Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
h Booster heater (L1/N)
Exception
▪ You can use a second power meter if:
▪ The power range of one meter is insufficient.
▪ The electrical meter cannot easily be installed in the electrical
cabinet.
▪ 230 V and 400 V three-phase grids are combined (very
uncommon), because of technical limitations of power meters.
▪ Connection and setup:
▪ Connect the second power meter to X5M/9 and X5M/10.
▪ In the software the power consumption data of both meters is
added so you do NOT have to set which meter covers which
power consumption. You only need to set the number of pulses
of each power meter.
▪ See "5.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply" on page 20 for
an example with two power meters.
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply
General rule
▪ Power meter 1: Measures the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2: Measures the rest (i.e. indoor unit, backup heater
and optional booster heater).
Setup
▪ Connect power meter 1 to X5M/7 and X5M/8.
▪ Connect power meter 2 to X5M/9 and X5M/10.
Power meter types
▪ Power meter 1: Single- or three-phase power meter according to
the power supply of the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2:
▪ In case of a single-phase backup heater configuration, use a
single-phase power meter.
▪ In other cases, use a three-phase power meter.
Example
Single-phase outdoor unit with a three-phase backup heater:
e
e
f
e
i
h
g
j
A
B
C
b
a
d
c
0580 1 50
0
0580 1 50
0
A
Outdoor unit
B
Indoor unit
C
DHW tank
a
Electrical cabinet (L1/N): Preferential kWh rate power
supply
b
Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N): Normal kWh rate power
supply
c
Power meter (L1/N)
d
Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
e
Fuse (L1/N)
f
Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
g
Outdoor unit (L1/N)
h
Indoor unit (L1/N)
i
Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
j
Booster heater (L1/N)
5.6
Setting up the power consumption
control
▪ The power consumption control:
▪ Is only applicable for RHBH/X04+08 and RHVH/X04+08.
▪ Allows you to limit the power consumption of the entire system
(sum of outdoor unit, indoor unit, backup heater and optional
booster heater).
▪ Configuration: Set the power limitation level and how it has to
be achieved via the user interface.
▪ The power limitation level can be expressed as:
▪ Maximum running current (in A)
▪ Maximum power input (in kW)
▪ The power limitation level can be activated:
▪ Permanently
▪ By digital inputs
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation
Permanent power limitation is useful to assure a maximum power or
current input of the system. In some countries, legislation limits the
maximum power consumption for space heating and DHW
production.
5 Application guidelines
Installer reference guide
21
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Pi
t
DI
a
b
Pi
Power input
t
Time
DI
Digital input (power limitation level)
a
Power limitation active
b
Actual power input
Setup and configuration
▪ No additional equipment needed.
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the
user
interface
(for
the
description
of
all
settings,
see
"8 Configuration" on page 45):
▪ Select full time limitation mode
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A)
▪ Set the desired power limitation level
NOTICE
Mind the following guidelines when selecting the desired
power limitation level:
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3.6 kW to
guarantee defrost operation. Otherwise, if defrosting is
interrupted several times, the heat exchanger will
freeze up.
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3 kW to
guarantee space heating and DHW production by
allowing at least one electrical heater (backup heater
step 1 or booster heater).
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital
inputs
Power limitation is also useful in combination with an energy
management system.
The power or current of the entire ROTEX system is limited
dynamically by digital inputs (maximum four steps). Each power
limitation level is set via the user interface by limiting one of the
following:
▪ Current (in A)
▪ Power input (in kW)
The energy management system (field supply) decides the activation
of a certain power limitation level. Example: To limit the maximum
power of the entire house (lighting, domestic appliances, space
heating…).
a
b
c
A
B
C
D
12345
A8P
A
Outdoor unit
B
Indoor unit
C
DHW tank
D
Energy management system
a
Power limitation activation (4 digital inputs)
b
Backup heater
c
Booster heater
Pi
t
DI4
DI3
DI1
a
b
Pi
Power input
t
Time
DI
Digital inputs (power limitation levels)
a
Power limitation active
b
Actual power input
Setup
▪ Demand PCB (option EKRP1AHTA) needed.
▪ Maximum
four
digital
inputs
are
used
to
activate
the
corresponding power limitation level:
▪ DI1 = weakest limitation (highest energy consumption)
▪ DI4 = strongest limitation (lowest energy consumption)
▪ For the specifications of the digital inputs, and for where to
connect them, refer to the wiring diagram.
Configuration
Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the user
interface (for the description of all settings, see "8 Configuration" on
page 45):
▪ Select activation by digital inputs.
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A).
▪ Set the desired power limitation level corresponding to each digital
input.
INFORMATION
In case more than 1 digital input is closed (at the same
time), the digital input priority is fixed: DI4 priority>…>DI1.
5.6.3
Power limitation process
The outdoor unit has better efficiency than the electrical heaters.
Therefore, the electrical heaters are limited and turned OFF first.
The system limits power consumption in the following order:
1
Limits certain electrical heaters.
If… has priority
Then set the heater priority
via the user interface to…
Domestic hot water production Booster heater.
Result: The backup heater will
be turned OFF first.
Space heating
Backup heater.
Result: The booster heater will
be turned OFF first.
2
Turns OFF all electrical heaters.
3
Limits the outdoor unit.
4
Turns OFF the outdoor unit.
Example
If the configuration is as follows:
▪ Power limitation level does NOT allow operation of both booster
heater and backup heater (step 1 and step 2).
▪ Heater priority = Booster heater.
Then power consumption is limited as follows:
Installer reference guide
22
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Ph
Ce
a
b
c
d
e
A
B
C
Ph
Produced heat
Ce
Consumed energy
A
Outdoor unit
B
Booster heater
C
Backup heater
a
Limited outdoor unit operation
b
Full outdoor unit operation
c
Booster heater turned ON
d
Backup heater step 1 turned ON
e
Backup heater step 2 turned ON
5.7
Setting up an external temperature
sensor
You can connect one external temperature sensor. It can measure
the outdoor ambient temperature. ROTEX recommends to use an
external temperature sensor in the following cases:
Outdoor ambient temperature
▪ In the outdoor unit, the outdoor ambient temperature is measured.
Therefore, the outdoor unit must be installed on a location:
▪ At the north side of the house or at the side of the house where
the most heat emitters are located
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
▪ If this is NOT possible, ROTEX recommends to connect a remote
outdoor sensor (option EKRSCA1).
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of
the remote outdoor sensor.
▪ Configuration: Select outdoor sensor [A.2.2.B].
▪ During suspend (see "8 Configuration" on page 45), the outdoor
unit is turned down to reduce the standby energy losses. As a
result, the outdoor ambient temperature is NOT read out.
▪ If the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent, the
full time outdoor temperature measurement is important. This is
another reason to install the optional outdoor ambient temperature
sensor.
INFORMATION
The external outdoor ambient sensor data (either averaged
or instantaneous) is used in the weather-dependent control
curves and in the automatic heating/cooling changeover
logic. To protect the outdoor unit, the internal sensor of the
outdoor unit is always used.
6
Preparation
6.1
Overview: Preparation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know before going
on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Preparing the installation site
▪ Preparing the refrigerant piping
▪ Preparing the water piping
▪ Preparing the electrical wiring
6.2
Preparing installation site
Do NOT install the unit in places often used as work place. In case
of construction works (e.g. grinding works) where a lot of dust is
created, the unit must be covered.
Choose the installation location with sufficient place for carrying the
unit in and out of the site.
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit
INFORMATION
Also read the following requirements:
▪ General
installation
site
requirements.
See
the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Refrigerant
piping
requirements
(length,
height
difference). See further in this "Preparation" chapter.
Mind the following spacing guidelines:
≤1200
>250
>250
>250
>350
>350
(mm)
(mm)
a
b
b
a
a
Air outlet
b
Air inlet
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT stack the units on each other.
▪ Do NOT hang the unit on a ceiling.
Strong winds (≥18 km/h) blowing against the outdoor unit’s air outlet
causes short circuit (suction of discharge air). This may result in:
▪ deterioration of the operational capacity;
▪ frequent frost acceleration in heating operation;
▪ disruption of operation due to decrease of low pressure or
increase of high pressure;
▪ a broken fan (if a strong wind blows continuously on the fan, it
may start rotating very fast, until it breaks).
It is recommended to install a baffle plate when the air outlet is
exposed to wind.
It is recommended to install the outdoor unit with the air inlet facing
the wall and NOT directly exposed to the wind.
b
a
b
c
a
Baffle plate
b
Prevailing wind direction
c
Air outlet
Installer reference guide
23
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
It is NOT recommended to install the unit in the following places
because it may shorten the life of the unit:
▪ Where the voltage fluctuates a lot
▪ In vehicles or vessels
▪ Where acidic or alkaline vapour is present
Seaside installation. Make sure the outdoor unit is NOT directly
exposed to sea winds. This is to prevent corrosion caused by high
levels of salt in the air, which might shorten the life of the unit.
Install the outdoor unit away from direct sea winds.
Example: Behind the building.
b
c
a
If the outdoor unit is exposed to direct sea winds, install a
windbreaker.
▪ Height of windbreaker≥1.5×height of outdoor unit
▪ Mind the service space requirements when installing the
windbreaker.
a
b
c
d
c
d
a
Sea wind
b
Building
c
Outdoor unit
d
Windbreaker
The outdoor unit is designed for outdoor installation only, and for
ambient temperatures ranging 10~43°C in cooling mode and –
25~25°C in heating mode.
6.2.2
Additional installation site requirements
of the outdoor unit in cold climates
Protect the outdoor unit against direct snowfall and take care that the
outdoor unit is NEVER snowed up.
a
b
c
c
d
a
Snow cover or shed
b
Pedestal
c
Prevailing wind direction
d
Air outlet
▪ In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm
above the maximum expected level of snow. See "7.3 Mounting
the outdoor unit" on page 29 for more details.
In heavy snowfall areas it is very important to select an installation
site where the snow will NOT affect the unit. If lateral snowfall is
possible, make sure that the heat exchanger coil is NOT affected by
the snow. If necessary, install a snow cover or shed and a pedestal.
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the
indoor unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Maximum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
30 m
Minimum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
3 m
Maximum height difference between indoor unit and
outdoor unit
20 m
Maximum distance between the 3‑way valve and
the indoor unit (for installations with domestic hot
water tank)
3 m
Maximum distance between the domestic hot water
tank and the indoor unit (for installations with
domestic hot water tank)
10 m
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
Installer reference guide
24
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
≥1150
200
200
10
10
500
(mm)
Do NOT install the unit in places such as:
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ The foundation must be strong enough to bear the weight of the
unit. Take the weight of the unit with a domestic hot water tank full
of water into account.
Make sure, in the event of a water leak, water cannot cause any
damage to the installation space and surroundings.
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible. Ambient temperature around the
indoor unit should be >5°C.
▪ The indoor unit is designed for indoor installation only and for
ambient temperatures ranging from 5~35°C.
6.3
Preparing refrigerant piping
6.3.1
Refrigerant piping requirements
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Piping material: Phosphoric acid deoxidised seamless copper.
▪ Piping diameter:
Liquid piping
Ø6.4 mm (1/4")
Gas piping
Ø15.9 mm (5/8")
▪ Piping temper grade and thickness:
Outer diameter
(Ø)
Temper grade
Thickness (t)(a)
6.4 mm (1/4")
Annealed (O)
≥0.8 mm
t
Ø
15.9 mm (5/8")
Annealed (O)
≥1.0 mm
(a)
Depending on the applicable legislation and the unit's
maximum working pressure (see "PS High" on the unit
name plate), larger piping thickness might be required.
6.3.2
Refrigerant piping insulation
▪ Use polyethylene foam as insulation material:
▪ with a heat transfer rate between 0.041 and 0.052 W/mK (0.035
and 0.045 kcal/mh°C)
▪ with a heat resistance of at least 120°C
▪ Insulation thickness
Pipe outer diameter
(Øp)
Insulation inner
diameter (Øi)
Insulation thickness
(t)
6.4 mm (1/4")
8~10 mm
10 mm
15.9 mm (5/8")
16~20 mm
13 mm
Øi
Øi
t
Øp
Øp
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
6.4
Preparing water piping
6.4.1
Water circuit requirements
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
NOTICE
In case of plastic pipes, make sure they are fully oxygen
diffusion tight according to DIN 4726. The diffusion of
oxygen into the piping can lead to excessive corrosion.
▪ Connecting piping – Legislation. Make all piping connections in
accordance with the applicable legislation and the instructions in
the "Installation" chapter, respecting the water inlet and outlet.
▪ Connecting piping – Force. Do NOT use excessive force when
connecting the piping. Deformation of the piping can cause
malfunctioning of the unit.
▪ Connecting piping – Tools. Only use appropriate tooling to
handle brass, which is a soft material. If NOT, pipes will get
damaged.
▪ Connecting piping – Air, moisture, dust. If air, moisture or dust
gets into the circuit, problems may occur. To prevent this:
▪ Only use clean pipes
▪ Hold the pipe end downwards when removing burrs.
▪ Cover the pipe end when inserting it through a wall, to prevent
dust and/or particles entering the pipe.
▪ Use a decent thread sealant to seal connections.
▪ Closed circuit. Use the indoor unit ONLY in a closed water
system. Using the system in an open water system will lead to
excessive corrosion.
▪ Glycol. For safety reasons, it is NOT allowed to add any kind of
glycol to the water circuit.
▪ Piping length. It is recommended to avoid long runs of piping
between the domestic hot water tank and the hot water end point
(shower, bath,…) and to avoid dead ends.
▪ Piping diameter. Select the water piping diameter in relation to
the required water flow and the available external static pressure
of the pump. See "14 Technical data" on page 84 for the external
static pressure curves of the indoor unit.
▪ Water flow. You can find the minimum required water flow for
indoor unit operation in the following table. In all cases, this flow
needs to be guaranteed. When the flow is lower, the indoor unit
will stop operation and display error 7H.
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
04+08 models
12 l/min
Installer reference guide
25
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
11+16 models
15 l/min
▪ Field supply components – Water. Only use materials that are
compatible with water used in the system and with the materials
used in the indoor unit.
▪ Field supply components – Water pressure and temperature.
Check that all components in the field piping can withstand the
water pressure and water temperature.
▪ Water pressure. The maximum water pressure is 4 bar. Provide
adequate safeguards in the water circuit to ensure that the
maximum pressure is NOT exceeded.
▪ Water temperature. All installed piping and piping accessories
(valve,
connections,…)
MUST
withstand
the
following
temperatures:
INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
M
FCU1
FCU2
FCU3
i
M
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
j
l
k
f
d e
c
b
a
f
g
h
i
i
i
T
65°C
89°C
a
Outdoor unit
b
Indoor unit
c
Heat exchanger
d
Backup heater
e
Pump
f
Shut-off valve
g
Motorised 3-way valve (supplied with the domestic hot
water tank)
h
Motorised 2-way valve (field supply)
i
Collector
j
Domestic hot water tank
k
Heat exchanger coil
l
Booster heater
FCU1...3
Fan coil unit (optional) (field supply)
FHL1...3
Floor heating loop (field supply)
T
Room thermostat (optional) (field supply)
▪ Drainage – Low points. Provide drain taps at all low points of the
system in order to allow complete drainage of the water circuit.
▪ Drainage – Pressure relief valve. Provide a proper drain for the
pressure relief valve to avoid water coming into contact with
electrical parts.
▪ Air vents. Provide air vents at all high points of the system, which
must also be easily accessible for servicing. An automatic air
purge is provided in the indoor unit. Check that the air purge is
NOT tightened too much, so that automatic release of air in the
water circuit is possible.
▪ Zn-coated parts. Never use Zn-coated parts in the water circuit.
Because the unit's internal water circuit uses copper piping,
excessive corrosion may occur.
▪ Non-brass metallic piping. When using non-brass metallic
piping, insulate the brass and non-brass properly so that they do
NOT make contact with each other. This to prevent galvanic
corrosion.
▪ Valve – Separating circuits. When using a 3-way valve in the
water circuit make sure that the domestic hot water circuit and the
floor heating circuit is fully separated.
▪ Valve – Change‑over time. When using a 2-way valve or a 3-way
valve in the water circuit, the maximum change-over time of the
valve must be 60 seconds.
▪ Filter. It is strongly recommended to install an additional filter on
the heating water circuit. Especially to remove metallic particles
from foul heating piping, it is recommended to use a magnetic or
cyclone filter, which can remove small particles. Small particles
may damage the unit and will NOT be removed by the standard
filter of the heat pump system.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Capacity. To avoid stagnation of
water, it is important that the storage capacity of the domestic hot
water tank meets the daily consumption of domestic hot water.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – After installation. Immediately after
installation, the domestic hot water tank must be flushed with fresh
water. This procedure must be repeated at least once a day the
first 5 consecutive days after installation.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Standstills. In cases where during
longer periods of time there is no consumption of hot water, the
equipment MUST be flushed with fresh water before usage.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Disinfection. For the disinfection
function of the domestic hot water tank, see "8.3.2 Domestic hot
water control: advanced" on page 60.
▪ Thermostatic mixing valves. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be necessary to install thermostatic mixing
valves.
▪ Hygienic measures. The installation must be in compliance with
the applicable legislation and may require additional hygienic
installation measures.
▪ Recirculation pump. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be required to connect a recirculation pump in
between the hot water end point and the recirculation connection
of the domestic hot water tank.
c
d
a
b
a
Recirculation connection
b
Hot water connection
c
Shower
d
Recirculation pump
6.4.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel
pre-pressure
The pre-pressure (Pg) of the vessel depends on the installation
height difference (H):
Pg=0.3+(H/10) (bar)
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate
The indoor unit has an expansion vessel of 10 litre with a factory-set
pre-pressure of 1 bar.
To make sure that the unit operates properly:
▪ You must check the minimum and maximum water volume.
Installer reference guide
26
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ You might need to adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion
vessel.
Minimum water volume
Check that the total water volume in the installation is minimum
10 litre, the internal water volume of the indoor unit NOT included.
INFORMATION
In critical processes, or in rooms with a high heat load,
extra water might be required.
NOTICE
When circulation in each space heating/cooling loop is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum water volume is guaranteed, even if all of the
valves are closed.
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
M1
T1
M2
T2
M3
T3
f
d
b c
a
f
g
h
e
a
Outdoor unit
b
Indoor unit
c
Heat exchanger
d
Backup heater
e
Pump
f
Shut-off valve
g
Collector (field supply)
h
By-pass valve (field supply)
FHL1...3
Floor heating loop (field supply)
T1...3
Individual room thermostat (optional)
M1...3
Individual motorised valve to control loop FHL1...3 (field
supply)
Maximum water volume
Use the following graph to determine the maximum water volume for
the calculated pre-pressure.
0.3
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
100
50
0 10
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
a
b
a
Pre-pressure (bar)
b
Maximum water volume (l)
Example: Maximum water volume and expansion vessel pre-
pressure
Installation
height
difference(a)
Water volume
≤280 l
>280 l
≤7 m
No pre-pressure
adjustment is required.
Do the following:
▪ Decrease
the
pre-
pressure according to
the required installation
height difference. The
pre-pressure
should
decrease by 0.1 bar for
each metre below 7 m.
▪ Check
if
the
water
volume
does
NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
>7 m
Do the following:
▪ Increase
the
pre-
pressure according to
the
required
installation
height
difference. The pre-
pressure
should
increase by 0.1 bar for
each metre above 7 m.
▪ Check if the water
volume
does
NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
The expansion vessel of
the indoor unit is too
small for the installation.
In this case, it is
recommended to install
an extra vessel outside
the unit.
(a)
This is the height difference (m) between the highest point
of the water circuit and the indoor unit. If the indoor unit is
at the highest point of the installation, the installation height
is 0 m.
Minimum flow rate
Check that the minimum flow rate (required during defrost/backup
heater operation) in the installation is guaranteed in all conditions.
NOTICE
When circulation in each or certain space heating loops is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum flow rate is guaranteed, even if all valves are
closed. In case the minimum flow rate cannot be reached,
a flow error 7H will be generated (no heating/operation).
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
04+08 models
12 l/min
11+16 models
15 l/min
See the recommended procedure as described in "9.4 Checklist
during commissioning" on page 73.
6.4.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel
NOTICE
Only a licensed installer may adjust the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel.
When changing the default pre-pressure of the expansion vessel
(1 bar) is required, take following guidelines into account:
▪ Only use dry nitrogen to set the expansion vessel pre-pressure.
▪ Inappropriate setting of the expansion vessel pre-pressure will
lead to malfunction of the system.
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel should be done
by releasing or increasing nitrogen pressure through the Schrader
valve of the expansion vessel.
Installer reference guide
27
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
a
a
Schrader valve
6.4.5
To check the water volume: Examples
Example 1
The indoor unit is installed 5 m below the highest point in the water
circuit. The total water volume in the water circuit is 100 l.
No actions or adjustments are required.
Example 2
The indoor unit is installed at the highest point in the water circuit.
The total water volume in the water circuit is 350 l.
Actions:
▪ Because the total water volume (350 l) is more than the default
water volume (280 l), the pre-pressure must be decreased.
▪ The required pre-pressure is:
Pg = (0.3+(H/10)) bar = (0.3+(0/10)) bar=0.3 bar.
▪ The corresponding maximum water volume at 0.3 bar is 410 l.
(See the graph in the chapter above).
▪ Because 350 l is lower than 410 l, the expansion vessel is
appropriate for the installation.
6.5
Preparing electrical wiring
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
WARNING
▪ If the power supply has a missing or wrong N-phase,
equipment might break down.
▪ Establish proper earthing. Do NOT earth the unit to a
utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earthing may cause electrical shock.
▪ Install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
▪ Secure the electrical wiring with cable ties so that the
cables do NOT come in contact with sharp edges or
piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
▪ Do NOT use taped wires, stranded conductor wires,
extension cords, or connections from a star system.
They can cause overheating, electrical shock or fire.
▪ Do NOT install a phase advancing capacitor, because
this unit is equipped with an inverter. A phase
advancing capacitor will reduce performance and may
cause accidents.
WARNING
▪ All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician and must comply with the applicable
legislation.
▪ Make electrical connections to the fixed wiring.
▪ All components procured on the site and all electrical
construction
must
comply
with
the
applicable
legislation.
WARNING
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply
and MUST be protected by the safety devices required by
the applicable legislation.
WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
6.5.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply
Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide
reliable electric service at competitive prices and are often
authorized to bill clients at benefit rates. E.g. time-of-use rates,
seasonal rates, Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and Austria, ...
This equipment allows for connection to such preferential kWh rate
power supply delivery systems.
Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site
where this equipment is to be installed to know whether it is
appropriate to connect the equipment in one of the preferential kWh
rate power supply delivery systems available, if any.
When the equipment is connected to such preferential kWh rate
power supply, the electricity company is allowed to:
▪ interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time;
▪ demand that the equipment only consumes a limited amount of
electricity during certain periods of time.
The indoor unit is designed to receive an input signal by which the
unit switches into forced off mode. At that moment, the outdoor unit
compressor will not operate.
Whether the power supply is interrupted or not, the wiring to the unit
is different.
Installer reference guide
28
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except
external actuators
Normal power
supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply is
NOT interrupted
Power supply is
interrupted
1
0580 1 50
0
2
a
3
1
4
0580 1 50
0
2
b
3
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is NOT
interrupted. The
outdoor unit is turned
off by the control.
Remark: The
electricity company
must always allow the
power consumption
of the indoor unit.
5
3
a
b
1
4
0580 1 50
0
0580 1 50
0
2
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is
interrupted
immediately or after
some time by the
electricity company.
In this case, the
indoor unit must be
powered by a
separate normal
power supply.
a
Normal power supply
b
Preferential kWh rate power supply
1
Power supply for outdoor unit
2
Power supply and interconnection cable to indoor unit
3
Power supply for backup heater
4
Preferential kWh rate power supply (voltage free contact)
5
Normal kWh rate power supply (to power the indoor unit
PCB in the event of power supply interruption of the
preferential kWh rate power supply)
6.5.4
Overview of electrical connections for
external and internal actuators
The following illustration shows the required field wiring.
INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
M
M
6
7
c
15
20
d
e
8 10
a
9
18
12
21
22
b
19
14
13
16
17
a
Single power supply for outdoor unit, backup heater and
booster heater
b
Backup heater
c
Indoor unit
d
Domestic hot water tank
e
Booster heater
Item
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Outdoor unit and indoor unit power supply
1
Power supply for
outdoor unit
2+GND or
3+GND
(a)
2
Power supply and
interconnection cable to
indoor unit
3
(c)
3
Power supply for
backup heater
See table below.
—
4
Preferential kWh rate
power supply (voltage
free contact)
2
(e)
5
Normal kWh rate power
supply
2
6.3 A
User interface
6
User interface
2
(f)
Optional equipment
7
3‑way valve
3
100 mA(b)
8
Power supply for
booster heater and
thermal protection
(from indoor unit)
4+GND
(c)
9
Power supply for
booster heater (to
indoor unit)
2+GND
13 A
10
Domestic hot water
tank thermistor
2
(d)
11
Power supply for
bottom plate heater
2
(b)
12
Room thermostat
3 or 4
100 mA(b)
13
Outdoor ambient
temperature sensor
2
(b)
14
Heat pump convector
4
100 mA(b)
Field supplied components
15
Shut-off valve
2
100 mA(b)
16
Electricity meter
2 (per meter)
(b)
17
Domestic hot water
pump
2
(b)
18
Alarm output
2
(b)
19
Changeover to external
heat source control
2
(b)
20
Space cool/heat
operation control
2
(b)
21
Power consumption
digital inputs
2 (per input
signal)
(b)
22
Safety thermostat
2
(e)
(a)
Refer to name plate on outdoor unit.
(b)
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
(c)
Cable section 2.5 mm².
(d)
The thermistor and connection wire (12 m) are delivered
with the domestic hot water tank.
(e)
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
50 m. Voltage-free contact shall ensure the minimum
applicable load of 15 V DC, 10 mA.
(f)
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m. Applicable for both single user interface and dual
user interface connection.
NOTICE
More technical specifications of the different connections
are indicated on the inside of the indoor unit.
Installer reference guide
29
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Backup heater
type
Power supply
Required number of
conductors
*3V
1× 230 V
2+GND
*9W
1× 230 V
2+GND + 2 bridges
3× 230 V
3+GND + 1 bridge
3× 400 V
4+GND
7
Installation
7.1
Overview: Installation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know on-site to
install the system.
Typical workflow
Installation typically consists of the following stages:
1
Mounting the outdoor unit.
2
Mounting the indoor unit.
3
Connecting the refrigerant piping.
4
Checking the refrigerant piping.
5
Charging refrigerant.
6
Connecting the water piping.
7
Connecting the electrical wiring.
8
Finishing the outdoor installation.
9
Finishing the indoor installation.
INFORMATION
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
7.2
Opening the units
7.2.1
About opening the units
At certain times, you have to open the unit. Example:
▪ When connecting the refrigerant piping
▪ When connecting the electrical wiring
▪ When maintaining or servicing the unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover
is removed.
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
1×
1
2
2
7.2.3
To open the indoor unit
1
Loosen and remove the 2 screws that fix the front panel.
2×
2
Tilt the front panel towards you and remove the front panel.
7.2.4
To open the switch box cover of the
indoor unit
4×
7.3
Mounting the outdoor unit
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit
When
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
Typical workflow
Mounting the outdoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
Providing the installation structure.
2
Installing the outdoor unit.
3
Providing drainage.
4
Protecting the unit against snow and wind by installing a snow
cover and baffle plates. See "Preparing installation site" in
"6 Preparation" on page 22.
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor
unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
Installer reference guide
30
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure
Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the
unit will not cause any operating vibration or noise.
Fix the unit securely by means of foundation bolts in accordance
with the foundation drawing.
If the unit is installed directly on the floor, prepare 4 sets of M8 or
M10 anchor bolts, nuts and washers (field supply) as follows:
INFORMATION
The maximum height of the upper protruding part of the
bolts is 15 mm.
283
580
<100
(mm)
<100
>300
In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above
the maximum expected level of snow. In this case, it is
recommended to construct a pedestal, and on this pedestal install
the EKFT008CA option kit.
283
580
<150
<150
(mm)
>300
100
a
b
a
Maximum snowfall height
b
EKFT008CA option kit
If the unit is installed on brackets to the wall, it is recommended to
use the EKFT008CA option kit and to install the unit as follows:
>250
>300
>250
(mm)
a
b
a
Maximum snowfall height
b
EKFT008CA option kit
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit
CAUTION
Do NOT remove the protective cardboard before the unit is
installed properly.
Installer reference guide
31
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
1
Lift the outdoor unit as described in "3.2.2 To remove the
accessories from the outdoor unit" on page 7.
2
Install the outdoor unit as follows:
2×
2
a
a
1
a
Air outlet
NOTICE
The pedestal MUST be aligned with the backside of the
U‑beam.
3
Remove the protective cardboard and instruction sheet.
b
a
a
Protective cardboard
b
Instruction sheet
7.3.5
To provide drainage
▪ Avoid installation places where water leaking from the unit due to
a blocked drain pan can cause damage to the location.
▪ Make sure that condensation water can be evacuated properly.
▪ Install the unit on a base to make sure that there is a proper
drainage in order to avoid ice accumulation.
▪ Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain
waste water surrounding the unit.
▪ Avoid drain water flowing over the footpath, so that it does not
become slippery in case of ambient freezing temperatures.
▪ If you install the unit on a frame, install a waterproof plate within
150 mm of the bottom side of the unit in order to prevent the
invasion of water in the unit and to avoid the drain water dripping
(see the following illustration).
NOTICE
If the drain holes of the outdoor unit are blocked up,
provide space of at least 300 mm below the outdoor unit.
An additional drain pan kit (EKDP008CA) can be used to gather the
drain water. The drain pan kit consists of:
b
a
a
Drain pan
b
U-beams
283 mm
580 mm
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling
over
In case the unit is installed in places where strong wind can tilt the
unit, take following measure:
1
Prepare 2 cables as indicated in the following illustration (field
supply).
2
Place the 2 cables over the outdoor unit.
3
Insert a rubber sheet between the cables and the outdoor unit
to prevent the cable from scratching the paint (field supply).
4
Attach the cable’s ends. Tighten those ends.
Installer reference guide
32
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
7.4
Mounting the indoor unit
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit
When
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
Typical workflow
Mounting the indoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
Installing the indoor unit.
2
Installing the drain pan kit (optional).
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the indoor
unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.4.3
To install the indoor unit
CAUTION
Do NOT grasp the piping to lift the indoor unit.
1
Lift the unit from the package.
60kg
2
Remove the 4 screws from the bottom of the unit. Unhook and
remove the side plates.
1
2
5×
3
3
3
Put the installation pattern (see packing) on the wall and follow
the steps as shown below.
2×
2
1
3
4
4
Lift the unit.
1
2
5
Tilt the top of the unit against the wall at the position of the 2
inserted screws.
6
Hook the unit against the wall.
2
1
2×
3
2×
7
Assemble the unit.
Installer reference guide
33
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
5×
7.4.4
To install the drain pan kit
If a drain pan kit (EKHBDPCA2) is required, install it before
connecting the refrigerant and water pipes and the electrical wiring.
To install, see the installation manual of the drain pan kit.
7.5
Connecting the refrigerant piping
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping
Before connecting the refrigerant piping
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the refrigerant piping involves:
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit
▪ Insulating the refrigerant piping
▪ Keeping in mind the guidelines for:
▪ Pipe bending
▪ Flaring pipe ends
▪ Brazing
▪ Using the stop valves
7.5.2
Precautions when connecting the
refrigerant piping
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
CAUTION
▪ Do NOT use mineral oil on flared part.
▪ Do NOT reuse piping from previous installations.
▪ NEVER install a drier to this R410A unit to guarantee
its lifetime. The drying material may dissolve and
damage the system.
NOTICE
Take the following precautions on refrigerant piping into
account:
▪ Avoid anything but the designated refrigerant to get
mixed into the refrigerant cycle (e.g. air).
▪ Only use R410A when adding refrigerant.
▪ Only use installation tools (e.g. manifold gauge set) that
are exclusively used for R410A installations to
withstand the pressure and to prevent foreign materials
(e.g. mineral oils and moisture) from mixing into the
system.
▪ Install the piping so that the flare is NOT subjected to
mechanical stress
▪ Protect the piping as described in the following table to
prevent dirt, liquid or dust from entering the piping.
▪ Use caution when passing copper tubes through walls
(see figure below).
Unit
Installation period
Protection method
Outdoor unit
>1 month
Pinch the pipe
<1 month
Pinch or tape the pipe
Indoor unit
Regardless of the
period
INFORMATION
Do NOT open the refrigerant stop valve before checking
the refrigerant piping. When you need to charge additional
refrigerant it is recommended to open the refrigerant stop
valve after charging.
7.5.3
Guidelines when connecting the
refrigerant piping
Take the following guidelines into account when connecting pipes:
▪ Coat the flare inner surface with ether oil or ester oil when
connecting a flare nut. Tighten 3 or 4 turns by hand, before
tightening firmly.
Installer reference guide
34
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ Always use 2 wrenches together when loosening a flare nut.
▪ Always use a spanner and torque wrench together to tighten the
flare nut when connecting the piping. This to prevent nut cracking
and leaks.
a
b
c
d
a
Torque wrench
b
Spanner
c
Piping union
d
Flare nut
Piping size
(mm)
Tightening
torque (N•m)
Flare
dimensions (A)
(mm)
Flare shape
(mm)
Ø6.4
15~17
8.7~9.1
R=0.4~0.8
45°±2
90°±2
A
Ø15.9
63~75
19.3~19.7
7.5.4
Pipe bending guidelines
Use a pipe bender for bending. All pipe bends should be as gentle
as possible (bending radius should be 30~40 mm or larger).
7.5.5
To flare the pipe end
CAUTION
▪ Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Do NOT re-use flares. Use new flares to prevent
refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Use flare nuts that are included with the unit. Using
different flare nuts may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
1
Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2
Remove burrs with the cut surface facing down so that the
chips do not enter the pipe.
a
b
a
Cut exactly at right angles.
b
Remove burrs.
3
Remove the flare nut from the stop valve and put the flare nut
on the pipe.
4
Flare the pipe. Set exactly at the position as shown in the
following illustration.
A
Flare tool for
R410A (clutch
type)
Conventional flare tool
Clutch type
(Ridgid-type)
Wing nut type
(Imperial-type)
A
0~0.5 mm
1.0~1.5 mm
1.5~2.0 mm
5
Check that the flaring is properly made.
a
b
c
a
Flare’s inner surface must be flawless.
b
The pipe end must be evenly flared in a perfect circle.
c
Make sure the flare nut is fitted.
7.5.6
To braze the pipe end
The indoor unit and outdoor unit have flare connections. Connect
both ends without brazing. If brazing should be needed, take the
following into account:
▪ When brazing, blow through with nitrogen to prevent creation of
large quantities of oxidised film on the inside of the piping. This
film adversely affects valves and compressors in the refrigerating
system and prevents proper operation.
▪ Set the nitrogen pressure to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) (just enough so it
can be felt on the skin) with a pressure-reducing valve.
a
b
c
d
e
f
f
a
Refrigerant piping
b
Part to be brazed
c
Taping
d
Manual valve
e
Pressure-reducing valve
f
Nitrogen
▪ Do NOT use anti-oxidants when brazing pipe joints.
Residue can clog pipes and break equipment.
▪ Do NOT use flux when brazing copper-to-copper refrigerant
piping. Use phosphor copper brazing filler alloy (BCuP), which
does not require flux.
Flux has an extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping
systems. For instance, if chlorine based flux is used, it will cause
pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will
deteriorate the refrigerant oil.
7.5.7
Using the stop valve and service port
To handle the stop valve
Take the following guidelines into account:
▪ The stop valves are factory closed.
▪ The following illustration shows each part required in handling the
valve.
c
d
a
b
a
Service port and service port cap
b
Valve stem
c
Field piping connection
d
Stem cap
▪ Keep both stop valves open during operation.
▪ Do NOT apply excessive force to the valve stem. Doing so may
break the valve body.
▪ Always make sure to secure the stop valve with a spanner, then
loosen or tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench. Do NOT place
the spanner on the stem cap, as this could cause a refrigerant
leak.
Installer reference guide
35
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
a
b
a
Spanner
b
Torque wrench
▪ When it is expected that the operating pressure will be low (e.g.
when cooling will be performed while the outside air temperature
is low), sufficiently seal the flare nut in the stop valve on the gas
line with silicon sealant to prevent freezing.
Silicon sealant, make sure there is no gap.
To open/close the stop valve
1
Remove the valve cover.
2
Insert a hexagon wrench (liquid side: 4 mm, gas side: 6 mm)
into the valve stem and turn the valve stem:
Counterclockwise to open.
Clockwise to close.
3
When the valve stem cannot be turned any further, stop turning.
The valve is now opened/closed.
To handle the stem cap
▪ The stem cap is sealed where indicated with the arrow. Do NOT
damage it.
▪ After handling the stop valve, tighten the stem cap, and check for
refrigerant leaks.
Item
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Stem cap, liquid side
13.5~16.5
Stem cap, gas side
22.5~27.5
To handle the service cap
▪ Always use a charge hose equipped with a valve depressor pin,
since the service port is a Schrader type valve.
▪ After handling the service port, tighten the service port cap, and
check for refrigerant leaks.
Item
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Service port cap
11.5~13.9
7.5.8
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
outdoor unit
1
Connect the liquid refrigerant connection from the indoor unit to
the liquid stop valve of the outdoor unit.
a
b
c
a
Liquid stop valve
b
Gas stop valve
c
Service port
2
Connect the gas refrigerant connection from the indoor unit to
the refrigerant stop valve of the outdoor unit.
NOTICE
It is recommended that the refrigerant piping between
indoor and outdoor unit is installed in a ducting or the
refrigerant piping is wrapped with finishing tape.
7.5.9
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
indoor unit
1
Connect the liquid stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant liquid connection of the indoor unit.
a
b
a
Refrigerant liquid connection
b
Refrigerant gas connection
2
Connect the gas stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant gas connection of the indoor unit.
NOTICE
It is recommended that the refrigerant piping between
indoor and outdoor unit is installed in a ducting or the
refrigerant piping is wrapped with finishing tape.
7.6
Checking the refrigerant piping
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping
The outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping has been factory tested
for leaks. You only have to check the outdoor unit's external
refrigerant piping.
Before checking the refrigerant piping
Make sure the refrigerant piping is connected between the outdoor
unit and the indoor unit.
Installer reference guide
36
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Typical workflow
Checking the refrigerant piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Checking for leaks in the refrigerant piping.
2
Performing vacuum drying to remove all moisture, air or
nitrogen from the refrigerant piping.
If there is a possibility of moisture being present in the refrigerant
piping (for example, water may have entered the piping), first carry
out the vacuum drying procedure below until all moisture has been
removed.
7.6.2
Precautions when checking the
refrigerant piping
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
NOTICE
Use a 2-stage vacuum pump with a non-return valve that
can evacuate to a gauge pressure of −100.7 kPa
(−1.007 bar)(5 Torr absolute). Make sure the pump oil
does not flow oppositely into the system while the pump is
not working.
NOTICE
Use this vacuum pump for R410A exclusively. Using the
same pump for other refrigerants may damage the pump
and the unit.
NOTICE
▪ Connect the vacuum pump to the service port of the
gas stop valve.
▪ Make sure that the gas stop valve and liquid stop valve
are firmly closed before performing the leak test or
vacuum drying.
7.6.3
To check for leaks
NOTICE
Do NOT exceed the unit's maximum working pressure (see
"PS High" on the unit name plate).
NOTICE
Make sure to use a recommended bubble test solution
from your wholesaler. Do not use soap water, which may
cause cracking of flare nuts (soap water may contain salt,
which absorbs moisture that will freeze when the piping
gets cold), and/or lead to corrosion of flared joints (soap
water may contain ammonia which causes a corrosive
effect between the brass flare nut and the copper flare).
1
Charge the system with nitrogen gas up to a gauge pressure of
at least 200 kPa (2 bar). It is recommended to pressurize to
3000 kPa (30 bar) in order to detect small leaks.
2
Check for leaks by applying the bubble test solution to all
connections.
3
Discharge all nitrogen gas.
7.6.4
To perform vacuum drying
Connect the vacuum pump and manifold as follows:
a
d
j
b
f
e
c
g h
i
h
a
Pressure meter
b
Gauge manifold
c
Low-pressure valve (Lo)
d
High-pressure valve (Hi)
e
Charging hoses
f
Vacuum pump
g
Service port
h
Valve lids
i
Gas stop valve
j
Liquid stop valve
1
Vacuum the system until the pressure on the manifold indicates
−0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
2
Leave as is for 4-5 minutes and check the pressure:
If the pressure…
Then…
Does not change
There is no moisture in the
system. This procedure is
finished.
Increases
There is moisture in the
system. Go to the next step.
3
Evacuate for at least 2 hours to a pressure on the manifold of
−0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
4
After turning OFF the pump, check the pressure for at least
1 hour.
5
If you do NOT reach the target vacuum or cannot maintain the
vacuum for 1 hour, do the following:
▪ Check for leaks again.
▪ Perform vacuum drying again.
NOTICE
Be sure to open the gas stop valve after piping installation
and vacuuming. Running the system with the valve closed,
the compressor may break down.
INFORMATION
After opening the stop valve, it is possible that the pressure
in the refrigerant piping does NOT increase. This might be
caused by e.g. the closed state of the expansion valve in
the outdoor unit circuit, but does NOT present any problem
for correct operation of the unit.
7.7
Charging refrigerant
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant
The outdoor unit is factory charged with refrigerant, but in some
cases the following might be necessary:
What
When
Charging additional refrigerant
When the total liquid piping
length is more than specified
(see later).
Completely recharging refrigerant Example:
▪ When relocating the system.
▪ After a leak.
Installer reference guide
37
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Charging additional refrigerant
Before charging additional refrigerant, make sure the outdoor unit's
external refrigerant piping is checked (leak test, vacuum drying).
INFORMATION
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
Typical workflow – Charging additional refrigerant typically consists
of the following stages:
1
Determining if and how much you have to charge additionally.
2
If necessary, charging additional refrigerant.
3
Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
Completely recharging refrigerant
Before completely recharging refrigerant, make sure the following is
done:
1
All refrigerant is recovered from the system.
2
The outdoor unit's external refrigerant piping is checked (leak
test, vacuum drying).
3
Vacuum drying on the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping is
performed.
NOTICE
Before completely recharging, perform vacuum drying on
the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping as well.
Typical workflow – Completely recharging refrigerant typically
consists of the following stages:
1
Determining how much refrigerant to charge.
2
Charging refrigerant.
3
Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
7.7.2
Precautions when charging refrigerant
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.7.3
To determine the additional refrigerant
amount
If the total liquid
piping length is…
Then…
≤10 m
Do NOT add additional refrigerant.
>10 m
R=(total length (m) of liquid
piping–10 m)×0.020
R=Additional charge (kg)(rounded in units
of 0.1 kg)
INFORMATION
Piping length is the one way length of liquid piping.
7.7.4
To determine the complete recharge
amount
INFORMATION
If a complete recharge is necessary, the total refrigerant
charge is: the factory refrigerant charge (see unit name
plate) + the determined additional amount.
7.7.5
To charge additional refrigerant
WARNING
▪ Only use R410A as refrigerant. Other substances may
cause explosions and accidents.
▪ R410A contains fluorinated greenhouse gases. Its
global warming potential (GWP) value is 2087.5. Do
NOT vent these gases into the atmosphere.
▪ When charging refrigerant, always use protective
gloves and safety glasses.
CAUTION
To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
Prerequisite: Before charging refrigerant, make sure the refrigerant
piping is connected and checked (leak test and vacuum drying).
1
Connect the refrigerant cylinder to the service port.
2
Charge the additional refrigerant amount.
3
Open the gas stop valve.
If pump down is needed in case of dismantling or relocating the
system, see "13.2 To pump down" on page 83 for more details.
7.7.6
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases
label
1
Fill in the label as follows:
b
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases
2
1
1
1
2
2
kg
tCO2eq
GWP × kg
1000
=
=
+
kg
=
kg
=
GWP: XXX
RXXX
a
f
c
d
e
a
If a multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label is
delivered with the unit (see accessories), peel off the
applicable language and stick it on top of a.
b
Factory refrigerant charge: see unit name plate
c
Additional refrigerant amount charged
d
Total refrigerant charge
e
Greenhouse gas emissions of the total refrigerant charge
expressed as tonnes CO2-equivalent
f
GWP = Global warming potential
NOTICE
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
2
Fix the label on the inside of the outdoor unit near the gas and
liquid stop valves.
Installer reference guide
38
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
7.8
Connecting the water piping
7.8.1
About connecting the water piping
Before connecting the water piping
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the water piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Connecting the water piping to the indoor unit.
2
Filling the water circuit.
3
Filling the domestic hot water tank.
4
Insulating the water piping.
7.8.2
Precautions when connecting the water
piping
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.8.3
To connect the water piping
NOTICE
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit.
To facilitate service and maintenance, 2 shut-off valves are provided.
Mount the valves on the water inlet and on the water outlet. Mind
their position: the integrated drain valves will only drain the side of
the circuit on which they are located. To be able to only drain the
unit, make sure the drain valves are positioned between the shut‑off
valves and the unit.
1
Install the shut-off valves on the water pipes.
a
b
a
Water inlet
b
Water outlet
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the surroundings in case of water
leakage, it is recommended to close the cold water inlet
shut‑off valves during periods of absence.
2
Screw the indoor unit nuts on the shut-off valves.
3
Connect the field piping on the shut-off valves.
4
In case of connection with the optional domestic hot water tank,
see the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
NOTICE
Install air purge valves at all local high points.
NOTICE
▪ A drain device and pressure relief device should be
installed on the cold water inlet connection of the
domestic hot water cylinder.
▪ To avoid back siphonage, it is recommended to install a
non-return valve on the water inlet of the domestic hot
water tank in accordance with the applicable legislation.
▪ It is recommended to install a pressure reducing valve
on the cold water inlet in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ An expansion vessel should be installed on the cold
water inlet in accordance with the applicable legislation.
▪ It is recommended to install the pressure relief valve on
a higher position than the top of the domestic hot water
tank. Heating of the domestic hot water tank causes
water to expand and without pressure relief valve the
water pressure inside the tank can rise above the tank
design pressure. Also the field installation (piping,
tapping points, etc.) connected to the tank is subjected
to this high pressure. To prevent this, a pressure
relieve valve needs to be installed. The overpressure
prevention depends on the correct operation of the field
installed pressure relief valve. If this is NOT working
correctly, overpressure will deform the tank and water
leakage may occur. To confirm good operation, regular
maintenance is required.
7.8.4
To fill the water circuit
1
Connect the water supply hose to the drain and fill valve.
2
Open the drain and fill valve.
3
Make sure that the automatic air purge valve is open (at least 2
turns).
4
Fill the circuit with water until the manometer indicates a
pressure of ±2.0 bar.
5
Purge as much air as possible from the water circuit. For
instructions, see "9 Commissioning" on page 73.
6
Close the drain and fill valve.
7
Disconnect the water supply hose from the drain and fill valve.
NOTICE
The water pressure indicated on the manometer will vary
depending on the water temperature (higher pressure at
higher water temperature).
However, at all times water pressure shall remain above
1 bar to avoid air entering the circuit.
7.8.5
To fill the domestic hot water tank
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank.
Installer reference guide
39
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
7.8.6
To insulate the water piping
The piping in the complete water circuit MUST be insulated to
prevent condensation during cooling operation and reduction of the
heating and cooling capacity.
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
7.9
Connecting the electrical wiring
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring
Before connecting the electrical wiring
Make sure:
▪ The refrigerant piping is connected and checked
▪ The water piping is connected
Typical workflow
Connecting the electrical wiring typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Making sure the power supply system complies with the
electrical specifications of the heat pump.
2
Connecting the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit.
3
Connecting the electrical wiring to the indoor unit.
4
Connecting the main power supply.
5
Connecting the backup heater power supply.
6
Connecting the user interface.
7
Connecting the shut–off valves.
8
Connecting the electrical meters.
9
Connecting the domestic hot water pump.
10
Connecting the alarm output.
11
Connecting the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output.
12
Connecting the changeover to an external heat source.
13
Connecting the power consumption digital inputs.
14
Connecting the safety thermostat.
7.9.2
About electrical compliance
Only for indoor units
See "7.9.8 To connect the backup heater power supply" on
page 41.
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the
electrical wiring
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
7.9.4
Guidelines when connecting the electrical
wiring
Keep the following in mind:
▪ If stranded conductor wires are being used, install a round crimp-
style terminal on the tip. Place the round crimp-style terminal on
the wire up to the covered part and fasten the terminal with the
appropriate tool.
b
a
a
Stranded conductor wire
b
Round crimp-style terminal
▪ Use the following methods for installing wires:
Wire type
Installation method
Single core wire
c b
c
a
a
A
AA´
A´
a Curled single core wire
b Screw
c Flat washer
Stranded conductor
wire with round
crimp-style terminal
c b
b
a
c
a
B
B
a Terminal
b Screw
c Flat washer
Tightening torques
Item
Tightening torque (N•m)
M4 (X1M)
1.2~1.5
M4 (earth)
7.9.5
To connect the electrical wiring on the
outdoor unit
1
Remove the 2 switch box cover screws.
2
Remove the switch box cover.
2×
1
2
3
Strip insulation (20 mm) from the wires.
a
b
a
Strip wire end to this point
b
Excessive strip length may cause electrical shock or
leakage.
4
Open the wire clamp.
5
Connect the interconnection cable and power supply as follows:
Installer reference guide
40
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
3×
1 2 3
6
Install the switch box cover.
7.9.6
To connect the electrical wiring on the
indoor unit
1
To open the indoor unit, see "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on
page 29.
2
Wiring should enter the unit from the bottom.
3
Routing of the wiring inside the unit should be as follows:
a
b
c
a
b
c
INFORMATION
When installing field supply or option cables, foresee
sufficient cable length. This will make it possible to remove/
reposition the switch box and gain access to other
components during service.
Routing
Possible cables (depending on unit type and installed options)
a
Low voltage
▪ Preferential power supply contact
▪ User interface
▪ Domestic hot water tank thermistor (option)
▪ Power consumption digital inputs (field supply)
▪ Outdoor ambient temperature sensor (option)
▪ Electrical meters (field supply)
▪ Safety thermostat (field supply)
b
High voltage power supply
▪ Interconnection cable
▪ Normal kWh rate power supply
▪ Preferential kWh rate power supply
▪ Power supply for backup heater
▪ Power supply for bottom plate heater (option)
▪ Power supply for booster heater (to indoor unit)
▪ Power supply for booster heater and thermal protection (from indoor unit)
c
High voltage control signal
▪ Heat pump convector (option)
▪ Room thermostat (option)
▪ 3-way valve
▪ Shut-off valve (field supply)
▪ Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
▪ Alarm output
▪ Changeover to external heat source control
▪ Space heat/cool operation control
4
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings to
ensure strain relief and to make sure that it does NOT come in
contact with the piping and sharp edges.
CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
7.9.7
To connect the main power supply
1
Connect the main power supply.
In case of normal kWh rate power supply
Installer reference guide
41
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
X1M
1 2 3
1 2 3
X2M
X5M
X6YB
X6YA
X6Y
X1A X19A
30 31
a
Legend: see illustration below.
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply
Connect X6Y to X6YB.
X1M
1 2 3
1 2
L N
L N
3
X2M
X5M
X6YB
X6YA
X6Y
X1A
X19A
S1S
30
31
3
4
a
b
c
a
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
b
Normal kWh rate power supply
c
Preferential power supply contact
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
INFORMATION
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply, connect
X6Y to X6YB. The necessity of separate normal kWh rate
power supply to indoor unit (b) X2M30/31 depends on the
type of preferential kWh rate power supply.
Separate connection to the indoor unit is required:
▪ if preferential kWh rate power supply is interrupted
when active, OR
▪ if no power consumption of the indoor unit is allowed at
the preferential kWh rate power supply when active.
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
7.9.8
To connect the backup heater power
supply
CAUTION
If the indoor unit has a tank with a built‑in electrical booster
heater, use a dedicated power circuit for the backup heater
and booster heater. NEVER use a power circuit shared by
another appliance. This power circuit MUST be protected
with the required safety devices according to the applicable
legislation.
CAUTION
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, always
connect the backup heater power supply and the earth
cable.
The backup heater capacity can vary, depending on the indoor unit
model. Make sure that the power supply is in accordance with the
backup heater capacity, as listed in the table below.
Backup
heater type
Backup
heater
capacity
Power
supply
Maximum
running
current
Zmax(Ω)
*3V
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
*9W
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
6 kW
1~ 230 V
26 A(a)(b)
—
6 kW
3~ 230 V
15 A
—
6 kW
3N~ 400 V
8.6 A
—
9 kW
3N~ 400 V
13 A
—
(a)
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for
harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and
≤75 A per phase.).
(b)
This equipment complies with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11
(European/International Technical Standard setting the
limits for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
public low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated
current ≤75 A) provided that the system impedance Zsys is
less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the
user's supply and the public system. It is the responsibility
of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by
consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a
supply with a system impedance Zsys less than or equal to
Zmax.
1
Connect the backup heater power supply. For *3V models, a
double‑pole fuse is used for F1B. For *9W models, a 4‑pole
fuse is used for F1B.
2
If required, modify the connections on terminals X6M and X7M.
Backup heater
type
Connections to
backup heater power
supply
Connections to
terminals
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*3V)
F1B
L
N
L
N
—
Installer reference guide
42
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Backup heater
type
Connections to
backup heater power
supply
Connections to
terminals
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
F1B
L
N
L
N
1 2 3 4
6 7 8
5
X6M
X7M
6 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
1 2 3 4
6 7 8
5
X6M
X7M
6 kW 3~ 230 V
(*9W)
F1B
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 4
6 7 8
5
X6M
X7M
6 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
F1B
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 4
6 7 8
5
X6M
X7M
Special remark for fuses:
Special remark for terminals:
As mentioned on the table above, the connections on the terminals
X6M and X7M need to be changed to configure a backup heater.
Refer to the illustration below as a caution about handling the
terminals.
3
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
4
Configure the user interface for the respective power supply.
See "8.2.2 Quick wizard: Standard" on page 48.
During connection of the backup heater, miswiring is possible. To
detect possible miswiring, it is highly recommended to measure the
resistance value of the heater elements. Depending on the different
backup heater types, following resistance values (see table below)
should be measured. ALWAYS measure the resistance on the
contactor clamps K1M, K2M, and K5M.
3 kW
1~
230 V
6 kW
1~
230 V
6 kW
3~
230 V
6 kW
3N~
400 V
9 kW
3N~
400 V
K1M/1
K5M/13
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
∞
∞
K1M/3
∞
∞
∞
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K1M/5
∞
∞
∞
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K1M/3
K1M/5
26.5Ω
26.5Ω
26.5Ω
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K2M/1
K5M/13
∞
26.5Ω
26.5Ω
∞
∞
K2M/3
∞
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K2M/5
∞
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K2M/3
K2M/5
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K1M/5
K2M/1
∞
∞
∞
∞
∞
Example measure resistance between K1M/1 and K5M/13:
K1M
K2M
K2M
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
K5M
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
Ω
Ω
7.9.9
To connect the user interface
▪ If you use 1 user interface, you can install it at the indoor unit (for
control close to the indoor unit), or in the room (when used as
room thermostat).
▪ If you use 2 user interfaces, you can install 1 user interface at the
indoor unit (for control close to the indoor unit) + 1 user interface
in the room (used as room thermostat).
Installer reference guide
43
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
The procedure differs slightly depending on where you install the
user interface.
#
At the indoor unit
In the room
1
Connect the user interface cable to the indoor unit.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
X2M
X5M
A2P
A2P
2
1
a
b
a Main user interface(a)
b Optional user interface
2
Insert a screwdriver into the slots underneath the user
interface and carefully separate the faceplate from the
wallplate.
The PCB is mounted in the faceplate of the user interface.
Be careful NOT to damage it.
3
Use the 2 screws in the accessory
bag to fix the wallplate of the user
interface to the sheet metal of the
unit.
Be careful NOT to distort the shape
of the backside of the user interface
by overtightening the mounting
screws.
Fix the wallplate of
the user interface to
the wall.
4
Connect as shown in 4A.
Connect as shown
in 4A, 4B, 4C or 4D.
5
Reinstall the faceplate onto the wallplate.
Be careful NOT to pinch the wiring when attaching the
frontplate to the unit.
(a)
The main user interface is required for operation, but has to
be ordered separately (mandatory option).
4A From the rear
b
a
PCB
1×
4B From the left
a
PCB
b
1×
4C From the top
a
b
PCB
b
1×
4D From the top centre
a
PCB
b
b
1×
a
Notch this part for the wiring to pass through with nippers
etc.
b
Secure the wiring to the front part of the casing using the
wiring retainer and clamp.
7.9.10
To connect the shut-off valve
1
Connect the valve control cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
NOTICE
Wiring is different for a NC (normal closed) valve and a NO
(normal open) valve.
X1M
X2M
5 6 7
M2S
X1M
X2M
5 6 7
M2S
NO
NC
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.11
To connect the electrical meters
INFORMATION
In case of an electrical meter with transistor output, check
the polarity. The positive polarity MUST be connected to
X5M/7 and X5M/9; the negative polarity to X5M/8 and
X5M/10.
1
Connect the electrical meters cable to the appropriate terminals
as shown in the illustration below.
Installer reference guide
44
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
X2M
X5M
78910
S2S S3S
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.12
To connect the domestic hot water pump
1
Connect the domestic hot water pump cable to the appropriate
terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X2M
35
34
1~M
M2P
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.13
To connect the alarm output
1
Connect the alarm output cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
X1M
X2M
29
X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
A4P
X2M
a
a
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.14
To connect the space cooling/heating ON/
OFF output
1
Connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X1M
X2M
29
X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
A4P
X2M
a
a
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.15
To connect the changeover to external
heat source
1
Connect the changeover to external heat source cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X1M
X1M
X3 X4
A4P
L N
X2M
X1 X2
a
a
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.16
To connect the power consumption digital
inputs
1
Connect the power consumption digital inputs cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X1M
X2M
1 2 3 4 5
A8P
X801M
S6S
S7S
S8S
S9S
a
a
Installation of EKRP1AHTA is required.
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.17
To connect the safety thermostat (normal
closed contact)
1
Connect the safety thermostat (normal closed) cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
Installer reference guide
45
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
3
4
X5M
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
NOTICE
Make sure to select and install the safety thermostat
according to the applicable legislation.
In any case, to prevent unnecessary tripping of the safety
thermostat, it is recommended that …
▪ … the safety thermostat is automatically resettable.
▪ … the safety thermostat has a maximum temperature
variation rate of 2°C/min.
▪ … there is a minimum distance of 2 m between the
safety thermostat and the motorised 3‑way valve
delivered with the domestic hot water tank.
INFORMATION
After it is installed, do NOT forget to configure the safety
thermostat. Without configuration, the indoor unit will
ignore the safety thermostat contact.
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
7.10
Finishing the outdoor unit
installation
7.10.1
To finish the outdoor unit installation
1
Insulate and fix the refrigerant piping and interconnection cable
as follows:
f
b
a
e
d
c
a
Gas pipe
b
Gas pipe insulation
c
Interconnection cable
d
Liquid pipe
e
Liquid pipe insulation
f
Finishing tape
2
Install the service cover.
7.10.2
To close the outdoor unit
1
Close the switch box cover.
2
Close the service cover.
NOTICE
When closing the outdoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
7.11
Finishing the indoor unit
installation
7.11.1
To fix the user interface cover to the
indoor unit
1
Make sure that the front panel is removed from the indoor unit.
See "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on page 29.
2
Plug the user interface cover into the hinges.
3
2
3
Mount the front panel to the indoor unit.
7.11.2
To close the indoor unit
1
Close the switch box cover.
2
Reinstall the front panel.
NOTICE
When closing the indoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
8
Configuration
8.1
Overview: Configuration
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to configure
the system after it is installed.
Why
If you do NOT configure the system correctly, it might NOT work as
expected. The configuration influences the following:
▪ The calculations of the software
▪ What you can see on and do with the user interface
How
You can configure the system using two different methods.
Method
Description
Configuring via the
user interface
First time – Quick wizard. When you turn
ON the user interface for the first time (via
the indoor unit), a quick wizard starts to help
you configure the system.
Afterwards. If necessary, you can make
changes to the configuration afterwards.
Installer reference guide
46
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Method
Description
Configuring via the
PC configurator
You can prepare the configuration off-site on
PC and afterwards upload the configuration
to the system with the PC configurator.
See also: "8.1.1 To connect the PC cable to
the switch box" on page 46.
INFORMATION
When the installer settings are changed, the user interface
will request to confirm. When confirmed, the screen will
shortly turn OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several
seconds.
Accessing settings – Legend for tables
You can access the installer settings using two different methods.
However, NOT all settings are accessible via both methods. If so,
the corresponding table columns in this chapter are set to N/A (not
applicable).
Method
Column in tables
Accessing settings via the breadcrumb in the
menu structure.
#
Accessing settings via the code in the
overview settings.
Code
See also:
▪ "To access the installer settings" on page 46
▪ "8.5 Menu structure: Overview installer settings" on page 72
8.1.1
To connect the PC cable to the switch box
Prerequisite: The EKPCCAB kit is required.
1
Connect the cable with USB connection to your PC.
2
Connect the plug of the cable to X10A on A1P of the switch box
of the indoor unit.
A1P
X10A
3
Pay special attention to the position of the plug!
2
3
4
5
H J S T
8.1.2
To access the most used commands
To access the installer settings
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A]:
> Installer settings.
To access the overview settings
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A.8]:
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
To set the user permission level to Installer
1
Set the user permission level to Adv. end user.
2
Go to [6.4]:
> Information > User permission level.
3
Press
for more than 4 seconds.
Result:
is displayed on the home pages.
4
If you do NOT press any button for more than 1 hour or press
again for more than 4 seconds, the installer permission level
switches back to End user.
To set the user permission level to Advanced end user
1
Go to the main menu or any of its submenus:
.
2
Press
for more than 4 seconds.
Result: The user permission level switches to Adv. end user.
Additional information is displayed and "+" is added to the menu title.
The user permission level will stay in Adv. end user until set
otherwise.
To set the user permission level to End user
1
Press
for more than 4 seconds.
Result: The user permission level switches to End user. The user
interface will return to the default home screen.
To modify an overview setting
Example: Modify [1‑01] from 15 to 20.
1
Go to [A.8]:
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
2
Go to the corresponding screen of the first part of the setting by
using the
and
button.
INFORMATION
An additional 0-digit is added to the first part of the setting
when you access the codes in the overview settings.
Example: [1‑01]: "1" will result in "01".
01
02
06
0a
0e
00
03
07
0b
0f
00
00
04
08
0c
00
01
05
09
0d
15
Overview settings
Confirm
Adjust
Scroll
3
Go to the corresponding second part of the setting by using the
and
button.
01
02
06
0a
0e
00
03
07
0b
0f
00
00
04
08
0c
00
01
05
09
0d
15
Overview settings
Confirm
Adjust
Scroll
Result: The value to be modified is now highlighted.
4
Modify the value by using the
and
button.
01
02
06
0a
0e
00
03
07
0b
0f
00
00
04
08
0c
00
01
05
09
0d
20
Overview settings
Confirm
Adjust
Scroll
5
Repeat previous steps if you have to modify other settings.
Installer reference guide
47
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
6
Push
to confirm the modification of the parameter.
7
At installer settings menu, press
to confirm the settings.
Installer settings
The system will restart.
Confirm
Adjust
Cancel
OK
Result: The system will restart.
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first
to the second user interface
If a second user interface is connected, the installer must first
proceed below instructions for the proper configuration of the 2 user
interfaces.
This procedure offers you also the possibility to copy the language
set from one user interface to the other one: e.g. from RKRUCBL2 to
RKRUCBL1.
1
When power is turned on for the first time, both user interfaces
display:
15:10
Tue
U5:Auto address
Push 4 sec. to continue
2
Push
for 4 seconds on the user interface on which you want
to proceed to the quick wizard. This user interface is now the
main user interface.
INFORMATION
During the quick wizard, the second user interface displays
Busy and will NOT be possible to operate.
3
The quick wizard will guide you.
4
For proper operation of the system, the local data on the two
user interfaces must be the same. If this is NOT the case, both
user interfaces will display:
Synchronization
Data difference detected.
Please select action:
Send data
Confirm
Adjust
5
Select the required action:
▪ Send data: the user interface you are operating contains the
correct data and the data on the other user interface will be
overwritten.
▪ Receive data: the user interface you are operating does
NOT contain the correct data and the data on the other user
interface will be used to overwrite.
6
The user interface requests confirmation if you are sure to
proceed.
Start copy
Are you sure you want to
start the copy operation?
Cancel
OK
Confirm
Adjust
7
Confirm the selection on the screen by pushing
and all data
(languages, schedules etc.) will be synchronised from the
selected source user interface to the other one.
INFORMATION
▪ During the copying, both controllers will NOT allow
operation.
▪ The copy operation can take up until 90 minutes.
▪ It is recommended to change installer settings, or the
configuration of the unit, on the main user interface. If
not, it can take up to 5 minutes before these changes
are visible in the menu structure.
8
Your system is now set to be operated by the 2 user interfaces.
8.1.4
To copy the language set from the first to
the second user interface
See "8.1.3 To copy the system settings from the first to the second
user interface" on page 47.
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after
first power ON
After first power ON of the system, you are guided on the user
interface to do initial settings:
▪ language,
▪ date,
▪ time,
▪ system layout.
By confirming the system layout, you can proceed with the
installation and commissioning of the system.
1
At power ON, the quick wizard starts as long as the system
layout was NOT confirmed yet, by setting the language.
Language
Select the desired language
Confirm
Adjust
2
Set the current date and time.
1
2012
Scroll
Adjust
Confirm
Date
What is the date today?
Sun
Jan
00 : 00
What is the current time?
Time
Confirm
Adjust
Scroll
Installer reference guide
48
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
3
Set the system layout settings: Standard, Options, Capacities.
For more details, see "8.2 Basic configuration" on page 48.
A.2
1
Scroll
Select
System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
4
After configuration, select Confirm layout and press
.
Confirm layout
Please confirm the system
layout. The system will
restart and will be ready for
first startup.
OK
Cancel
Confirm
Adjust
5
The user interface re-initialises and you can proceed the
installation by setting the other applicable settings and
commissioning of the system.
When the installer settings are changed, the system will request to
confirm. When confirmation is complete, the screen will shortly turn
OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several seconds.
8.2
Basic configuration
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date
#
Code
Description
[A.1]
N/A
Language
[1]
N/A
Time and date
8.2.2
Quick wizard: Standard
Backup heater configuration (only for *9W model)
The backup heater in a *9W model is adapted to be connected to
most common European electricity grids. Besides hardware
configuration, the grid type and the relay setting must be set on the
user interface.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.5]
[5-0D]
BUH type:
▪ 1 (1P,(1/1+2)): 6 kW 1~ 230 V (*9W)
▪ 3 (3P,(1/1+2)): 6 kW 3~ 230 V (*9W)
▪ 4 (3PN,(1/2)): 6 kW 3N~ 400 V (*9W)
▪ 5 (3PN,(1/1+2)): 9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
Relay setting
Relay setting
Backup heater operation
If backup heater
step 1 is active:
If backup heater
step 2 is active:
1/1+2
Relay 1 ON
Relays 1+2 ON
1/2
Relay 1 ON
Relay 2 ON
Space heating/cooling settings
The system can heat up or cool down a space. Depending on the
type of application, the space heating/cooling settings must be made
accordingly.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.7]
[C-07]
Unit control method:
▪ 0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving water
temperature regardless the actual
room temperature and/or heating or
cooling demand of the room.
▪ 1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation is
decided by the external thermostat or
equivalent (e.g. heat pump convector).
▪ 2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided
based
on
the
ambient
temperature of the user interface.
[A.2.1.B]
N/A
Only if there are 2 user interfaces (1
installed in the room, 1 installed at the
indoor unit):
a
b
▪ a: At unit
▪ b: In room as room thermostat
User interface location:
▪ At unit: the other user interface is
automatically set to In room and if RT
control is selected act as room
thermostat.
▪ In room (default): the other user
interface is automatically set to At unit
and if RT control is selected to act as
room thermostat.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.8]
[7-02]
The system can supply leaving water to
up to 2 water temperature zones. During
configuration, the number of water zones
must be set.
Number of LWT zones:
▪ 0 (1 LWT zone)(default): Only 1
leaving water temperature zone. This
zone is called the main leaving water
temperature zone.
a
▪ a: Main LWT zone
continued >>
Installer reference guide
49
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.8]
[7-02]
<< continuation
▪ 1 (2 LWT zones): 2 leaving water
temperature zones. The zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature (in
heating) is called the main leaving
water temperature zone. The zone
with
the
highest
leaving
water
temperature (in heating) is called the
additional leaving water temperature
zone. In practice, the main leaving
water temperature zone consists of
the higher load heat emitters and a
mixing station is installed to achieve
the desired leaving water temperature.
a
b
▪ a: Add LWT zone
▪ b: Main LWT zone
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.9]
[F-0D]
When the space heating/cooling control
is OFF by the user interface, the pump is
always OFF. When the space heating/
cooling control is On, you can select the
desired pump operation mode (only
applicable during space heating/cooling)
Pump operation mode:
▪ 0 (Continuous): Continuous pump
operation, regardless of thermo ON or
OFF condition. Remark: continuous
pump operation requires more energy
than
sample
or
request
pump
operation.
a
b
c
d
b
c
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
▪ d: Pump operation
continued >>
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.9]
[F-0D]
<< continuation
▪ 1 (Sample)(default): The pump is ON
when there is heating or cooling
demand
as
the
leaving
water
temperature has not reached the
desired temperature yet. When thermo
OFF condition occurs, the pump runs
every 5 minutes to check the water
temperature and demand heating or
cooling if necessary. Remark: Sample
is NOT available in external room
thermostat control or room thermostat
control.
a
b
d
e
f
c
g
b
c
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
▪ d: LWT temperature
▪ e: Actual
▪ f: Desired
▪ g: Pump operation
continued >>
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.9]
[F-0D]
<< continuation
▪ 2 (Request): Pump operation based
on request. Example: Using a room
thermostat creates thermo ON/OFF
condition. When there is no such
demand, the pump is OFF. Remark:
Request is NOT available in leaving
water temperature control.
a
d
e
b
b
c
b
c
c
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
▪ d: Heating demand (by ext RT or
RT)
▪ e: Pump operation
8.2.3
Quick wizard: Options
Domestic hot water settings
This chapter only applies to systems with a domestic hot water tank
installed:
▪ RHBH/X: an optional domestic hot water tank is available,
▪ RHVH/X: a domestic hot water tank is standard incorporated into
the indoor unit.
Installer reference guide
50
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Following settings must be made accordingly.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.2.1]
[E-05]
DHW operation:
Can the system prepare domestic hot
water?
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed. Default for
RHBH/X.
▪ 1 (Yes): N/A.
[A.2.2.3]
[E-07]
During domestic hot water preparation,
the heat pump can be assisted by an
electrical heater to ensure the domestic
hot water preparation even for high
desired tank temperatures.
DHW tank type:
▪ 0 (Type 1): Tank with booster heater
installed at the side of the tank.
Default for RHBH/X.
▪ 1 (Type 2): N/A.
Range: 0~6. However, values 2~6 are
not applicable for this setting. If the
setting is set to 6, an error code will
appear and the system will NOT operate.
[A.2.2.A]
[D-02]
The indoor unit offers the possibility to
connect a field supplied domestic hot
water pump (On/OFF type). Depending
on the installation and configuration on
the user interface, we distinguish its
functionality.
DHW pump:
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Secondary rtrn): Installed for instant
hot water when water is tapped. The
end-user sets the operation timing
(weekly
schedule
time)
of
the
domestic hot water pump when it
should run. Control of this pump is
possible through the indoor unit.
▪ 2
(Disinf.
shunt):
Installed
for
disinfection.
It
runs
when
the
disinfection function of the domestic
hot water tank is running. No further
settings are needed.
See also illustrations below.
Domestic hot water pump installed for…
Instant hot water
Disinfection
c
f
b
a
g
c
b
a
d
f
e
g
a
Indoor unit
b
Tank
c
Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
d
Heater element (field supply)
e
Non‑return valve (field supply)
f
Shower (field supply)
g
Cold water
INFORMATION
The correct domestic hot water default settings becomes
only applicable when domestic hot water operation is
activated ([E‑05]=1).
Thermostats and external sensors
NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 10.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.2.4]
[C-05]
Contact type main
In external room thermostat control, the
contact type of the optional room
thermostat or heat pump convector for
the main leaving water temperature zone
must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 10.
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): The connected
external room thermostat or heat
pump convector sends the heating or
cooling demand by the same signal as
it is connected to only 1 digital input
(preserved for the main leaving water
temperature zone) on the indoor unit
(X2M/1). Select this value in case of a
connection
to
the
heat
pump
convector (RFWXV).
▪ 2
(H/C
request)(default):
The
connected external room thermostat
sends separate heating and cooling
demand and is therefore connected to
the 2 digital input (preserved for the
main leaving water temperature zone)
on the indoor unit (X2M/1 and 2).
Select this value in case of connection
with the wired (RKRTWA) or wireless
(RKRTR1) room thermostat.
[A.2.2.5]
[C-06]
Contact type add.
In external room thermostat control with
2 leaving water temperature zones, the
type of the optional room thermostat for
the additional leaving water temperature
zone must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 10.
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): See Contact
type main. Connected on the indoor
unit (X2M/1a).
▪ 2 (H/C request)(default): See Contact
type main. Connected on the indoor
unit (X2M/1a and 2a).
Installer reference guide
51
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[A.2.2.B]
[C-08]
External sensor
When an optional external ambient
sensor is connected, the type of the
sensor must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 10.
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed. The
thermistor in the user interface and in
the
outdoor
unit
are
used
for
measurement.
▪ 1 (Outdoor sensor): Installed. The
outdoor sensor will be used to
measure
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
Remark:
For
some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
▪ 2 (Room sensor): NOT applicable.
Digital I/O PCB
Modification of these settings is only needed when the optional
digital I/O PCB is installed. The digital I/O PCB has multiple
functionality which need to be configured. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 10.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.2.6.1]
[C-02]
Ext. backup heat src
Indicates if the space heating is also
performed by means of another heat
source than the system.
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Bivalent): Installed. The auxiliary
boiler
(gasboiler,
oil
burner)
will
operate when the outdoor ambient
temperature is low. During the bivalent
operation, the heat pump is turned
OFF. Set this value in case an
auxililary
boiler
is
used.
See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 10.
[A.2.2.6.3]
[C-09]
Alarm output
Indicates the logic of the alarm output on
the digital I/O PCB during
malfunctioning.
▪ 0 (Normally open): The alarm output
will be powered when an alarm
occurs. By setting this value, a
distinction
is
made
between
the
detection of an alarm, and the
detection of a power failure.
▪ 1 (Normally closed): The alarm output
will NOT be powered when an alarm
occurs.
See also table below (Alarm output
logic).
#
Code
Description
[A.2.2.6.4]
[F-04]
Bottom plate heater
Only applicable for RHBH/X11+16 and
RHVH/X11+16. Indicates if an optional
bottom plate heater is installed on the
outdoor unit. The power of the bottom
plate heater is in this case supplied by
the indoor unit.
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Yes): Installed. Remark: If this
value is set, the output on the digital I/
O PCB cannot be used for space
heating/cooling
output.
See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 10.
Alarm output logic
[C-09]
Alarm
No alarm
No power
supply to unit
0 (default)
Closed output
Open output
Open output
1
Open output
Closed output
Demand PCB
The demand PCB is used to enable the power consumption control
by digital inputs. See "5 Application guidelines" on page 10.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.2.7]
[D-04]
Demand PCB
Only applicable for RHBH/X04+08.
Indicates if the optional demand PCB is
installed.
▪ 0 (No)(default)
▪ 1 (Pwr consmp ctrl)
Energy metering
When energy metering is performed by the use of external power
meters, configure the settings as described below. Select the pulse
frequency output of each power meter in accordance with the power
meter specifications. It is possible to connect (up to 2) power meters
with different pulse frequencies. When only 1 or no power meter is
used, select No to indicate the corresponding pulse input is NOT
used.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.2.8]
[D‑08]
Optional external kWh meter 1:
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
[A.2.2.9]
[D‑09]
Optional external kWh meter 2:
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
Installer reference guide
52
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy
metering)
The capacities of all electrical heaters must be set for the energy
metering and/or power consumption control feature to work properly.
When measuring the resistance value of each heater, you can set
the exact heater capacity and this will lead to more accurate energy
data.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.3.1]
[6-02]
Booster heater: Only applies to domestic
hot water tanks with an internal booster
heater (RKHW). The capacity of the
booster heater at nominal voltage.
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW):
▪ RHBH/X: default 3 kW
▪ RHVH/X: default 0 kW
[A.2.3.2]
[6-03]
BUH: step 1: The capacity of the first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value 3 kW. Default:
3 kW.
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
[A.2.3.3]
[6-04]
BUH: step 2: Only applies to a two-step
backup heater (*9W). The capacity
difference between the second and first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value depends on the
backup heater configuration:
▪ 3 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 0 kW
▪ 6 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
▪ 6 kW, 3~ 230 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
▪ 6 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
▪ 9 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 6 kW (9 kW-3 kW)
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW):
▪ *3V: default 0 kW
▪ *9W: default 6 kW
[A.2.3.6]
[6-07]
Bottom plate heater: Only applies to an
optional bottom plate heater. The
capacity of the optional bottom plate
heater at nominal voltage. Default: 0 W.
Range: 0~200 W (in steps of 10 W)
8.2.5
Space heating/cooling control
The basic required settings in order to configure the space heating/
cooling of your system are described in this chapter. The weather-
dependent installer settings define the parameters for the weather-
dependent operation of the unit. When weather-dependent operation
is active, the water temperature is determined automatically
depending on the outdoor temperature. Low outdoor temperatures
will result in warmer water and vice versa. During weather-
dependent operation, the user has the possibility to shift up or down
the target water temperature by a maximum of 5°C.
See the user reference guide and/or operation manual for more
details about this function.
Leaving water temperature: Main zone
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.1]
N/A
LWT setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed (default)
The
desired
leaving
water
temperature is:
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ Weather dep.: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
continued >>
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.1]
N/A
<< continuation
▪ Fixed/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ NOT
weather-dependent
(i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled
actions
consists
of
desired shift actions, either preset
or custom.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ WD/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent
(i.e.,
does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled
actions
consists
of
desired
leaving
water
temperatures
either
preset
or
custom.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
#
Code
Description
[7.7.1.1]
[1-00]
[1-01]
[1-02]
[1-03]
Set weather-dependent heating:
[1-03]
[1-02]
Ta
Tt
[1-00]
[1-01]
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
Installer reference guide
53
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[7.7.1.1]
[1-00]
[1-01]
[1-02]
[1-03]
<< continuation
▪ [1-00]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. −40°C~+5°C (default:
−10°C)
▪ [1-01]:
High
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
10°C~25°C
(default:
15°C)
▪ [1-02]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 35°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-03] as for low outdoor
temperatures
warmer
water
is
required.
▪ [1-03]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑01]°C~min(45, [9‑00])°C (default:
25°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-02] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
#
Code
Description
[7.7.1.2]
[1-06]
[1-07]
[1‑08]
[1-09]
Set weather-dependent cooling:
[1-09]
[1-08]
Ta
Tt
[1-06]
[1-07]
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
#
Code
Description
[7.7.1.2]
[1-06]
[1-07]
[1‑08]
[1-09]
<< continuation
▪ [1-06]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
10°C~25°C
(default:
20°C)
▪ [1-07]:
High
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
25°C~43°C
(default:
35°C)
▪ [1-08]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 22°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-09] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
▪ [1-09]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-08] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
Leaving water temperature: Additional zone
Only applicable if 2 leaving water temperature zones are present.
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.2.1]
N/A
LWT setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed (default): The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ Weather dep.: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ Fixed/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ NOT
weather-dependent
(i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ WD/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent
(i.e.,
does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
Installer reference guide
54
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[7.7.2.1]
[0-00]
[0-01]
[0-02]
[0-03]
Set weather-dependent heating:
[0-00]
[0-01]
Ta
Tt
[0-03]
[0-02]
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
#
Code
Description
[7.7.2.1]
[0-00]
[0-01]
[0-02]
[0-03]
<< continuation
▪ [0-03]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. −40°C~+5°C (default:
−10°C)
▪ [0-02]:
High
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
10°C~25°C
(default:
15°C)
▪ [0-01]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑05]°C~[9‑06]°C (default: 45°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0-00] as for low outdoor
temperatures
warmer
water
is
required.
▪ [0-00]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑05]°C~min(45, [9‑06])°C (default:
35°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0-01] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
#
Code
Description
[7.7.2.2]
[0-04]
[0-05]
[0-06]
[0-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling:
[0-04]
[0-05]
Ta
Tt
[0-07]
[0-06]
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
#
Code
Description
[7.7.2.2]
[0-04]
[0-05]
[0-06]
[0-07]
<< continuation
▪ [0-07]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
10°C~25°C
(default:
20°C)
▪ [0-06]:
High
outdoor
ambient
temperature.
25°C~43°C
(default:
35°C)
▪ [0-05]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C (default: 12°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0‑04] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
▪ [0-04]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C (default: 8°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0‑05] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
Leaving water temperature: Delta T source
Temperature difference for entering and leaving water. The unit is
designed to support under floor loops operation. The recommended
leaving water temperature (set by the user interface) for under floor
loops is 35°C. In such case, the unit will be controlled to realize a
temperature difference of 5°C which means that the entering water
to the unit is around 30°C. Depending on the installed application
(radiators, heat pump convector, under floor loops) or situation, it
can be possible to change the difference between entering and
leaving water temperature. Note that the pump will regulate its flow
to keep the Δt.
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.3.1]
[9-09]
Heating: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water. Range: 3°C~10°C (in
steps of 1°C; default value: 5°C).
[A.3.1.3.2]
[9-0A]
Cooling: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water. Range: 3°C~10°C (in
steps of 1°C; default value: 5°C).
Leaving water temperature: Modulation
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. When using the
room thermostat functionality, the customer needs to set the desired
room temperature. The unit will supply hot water to the heat emitters
and the room will be heated. Additionally, also the desired leaving
water temperature must be configured: when turning on the
modulation, the desired leaving water temperature will be calculated
automatically by the unit (based on the preset temperatures, if
weather-dependent is selected, modulation will be done based on
the desired weather-dependent temperatures); when turning off the
modulation, you can set the desired leaving water temperature on
the user interface. Moreover, with the modulation turned on, the
desired leaving water temperature is lowered or raised in function of
the desired room temperature and the difference between the actual
and the desired room temperature. This results in:
▪ stable
room
temperatures
exactly
matching
the
desired
temperature (higher comfort level)
▪ less On/OFF cycles (lower noise level, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
Installer reference guide
55
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ water temperatures as low as possible to match the desired
temperature (higher efficiency)
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.5]
[8-05]
Modulated LWT:
▪ No (default): disabled.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature needs to be set on the
user interface.
▪ Yes: enabled. The leaving water
temperature is calculated according
to the difference between the desired
and the actual room temperature.
This creates a better match between
the capacity of the heat pump and
the actual required capacity, and
results in less start/stop cycles and a
more economic operation.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature can only be read out on
the user interface
N/A
[8-06]
Leaving water temperature maximum
modulation:
0°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
Requires modulation to be enabled.
This is the value by which the desired
leaving water temperature is increased
or lowered.
INFORMATION
When leaving water temperature modulation is enabled,
the weather‑dependent curve needs to be set to a higher
position than [8-06] plus the minimum leaving water
temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition
on the comfort setpoint for the room. To increase
efficiency, modulation can lower the leaving water setpoint.
By setting the weather‑dependent curve to a higher
position, it cannot drop below the minimum setpoint. Refer
to the illustration below.
a
+[8-06]
−[8-06]
b
Ta
Tt
a
Weather-dependent curve
b
Minimum leaving water temperature setpoint required to
reach a stable condition on the comfort setpoint for the
room.
Leaving water temperature: Emitter type
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. Depending on
the system water volume and the heat emitters type, the heat up or
cool down of a space can take longer. This setting can compensate
for a slow or a quick heating/cooling system during the heat up/cool
down cycle.
Note: The setting of the emitter type will influence the maximum
modulation of the desired leaving water temperature and the
possibility for usage of the automatic cooling/heating changeover
based on the indoor ambient temperature.
Therefore it is important to set this correctly.
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.7]
[9-0B]
Emitter type:
Reaction time of the system:
▪ Quick Example: Small water volume
and fan coils.
▪ Slow Example: Large water volume,
floor heating loops.
8.2.6
Domestic hot water control
Only applicable in case an optional domestic hot water tank is
installed.
Configuring the desired tank temperature
The domestic hot water can be prepared in 3 different ways. They
differ from each other by the way the desired tank temperature is set
and how the unit acts upon it.
#
Code
Description
[A.4.1]
[6-0D]
Domestic hot water Type:
▪ 0 (Reheat only): Only reheat operation
is allowed.
▪ 1 (Reheat + sched.): The domestic hot
water tank is heated according to a
schedule and between the scheduled
heatup cycles, reheat operation is
allowed.
▪ 2 (Scheduled only): The domestic hot
water tank can ONLY be heated
according to a schedule.
See "8.3.2 Domestic hot water control: advanced" on page 60 for
more details.
INFORMATION
There is a risk of space heating (cooling) capacity
shortage/comfort problem (in case of frequent domestic hot
water operation, frequent and long space heating/cooling
interruption will happen) when selecting [6‑0D]=0 ([A.4.1]
Domestic hot water Type=Reheat only) in case of a
domestic hot water tank without an internal booster heater.
Maximum DHW temperature setpoint
The maximum temperature that users can select for the domestic
hot water. You can use this setting to limit the temperatures at the
hot water taps.
INFORMATION
During disinfection of the domestic hot water tank, the
DHW temperature can exceed this maximum temperature.
INFORMATION
Limit the maximum hot water temperature according to the
applicable legislation.
Installer reference guide
56
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[A.4.5]
[6-0E]
Maximum setpoint
The maximum temperature that users
can select for the domestic hot water.
You can use this setting to limit the
temperature at the hot water taps.
If
▪ [E-07]≠1: 40°C~80°C (default: 60°C)
(for RHBH/X in combination with
RKHW)
▪ [E-07]=1: 40°C~60°C (default: 60°C)
(only for RHVH/X)
The maximum temperature is NOT
applicable during disinfection function.
See disinfection function.
8.2.7
Contact/helpdesk number
#
Code
Description
[6.3.2]
N/A
Number that users can call in case of
problems.
8.3
Advanced configuration/
optimization
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation:
advanced
Preset leaving water temperature
You can define preset leaving water temperatures:
▪ economic (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the lowest energy consumption)
▪ comfort (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the highest energy consumption).
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule or
to adjust the desired leaving water temperature according to the
room temperature (see modulation). If you later want to change the
value, you ONLY have to do it in one place. Depending on whether
the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent or NOT,
the desired shift values or the absolute desired leaving water
temperature should be specified.
NOTICE
The preset leaving water temperatures are ONLY
applicable for the main zone, as the schedule for the
additional zone consists of On/OFF actions.
NOTICE
Select preset leaving water temperatures in accordance
with the design and selected heat emitters to ensure the
balance between desired room and leaving water
temperatures.
#
Code
Description
Preset leaving water temperature for the main leaving water
temperature zone in case of NOT weather dependent
[7.4.2.1]
[8-09]
Comfort (heating)
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 35°C)
[7.4.2.2]
[8-0A]
Eco (heating)
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 33°C)
[7.4.2.3]
[8-07]
Comfort (cooling)
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C)
#
Code
Description
[7.4.2.4]
[8-08]
Eco (cooling)
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 20°C)
Preset leaving water temperature (shift value) for the main leaving
water temperature zone in case of weather dependent
[7.4.2.5]
N/A
Comfort (heating)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
[7.4.2.6]
N/A
Eco (heating)
–10°C~+10°C (default: –2°C)
[7.4.2.7]
N/A
Comfort (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
[7.4.2.8]
N/A
Eco (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 2°C)
Temperature ranges (leaving water temperatures)
The purpose of this setting is to prevent selecting a wrong (i.e. too
hot or too cold) leaving water temperature. Therefore the available
desired heating temperature range and desired cooling temperature
range can be configured.
NOTICE
In case of a floor heating application it is important to limit
the:
▪ maximum leaving water temperature at heating
operation according to the specifications of the floor
heating installation.
▪ the minimum leaving water temperature at cooling
operation to 18~20°C to prevent condensation on the
floor.
NOTICE
▪ When adjusting the leaving water temperature ranges,
all desired leaving water temperatures are also
adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.
▪ Always balance between the desired leaving water
temperature with the desired room temperature and/or
the capacity (according to the design and selection of
the
heat
emitters).
The
desired
leaving
water
temperature is the result of several settings (preset
values, shift values, weather dependent curves,
modulation). As a result, too high or too low leaving
water temperatures could occur which lead to
overtemperatures or capacity shortage. By limiting the
leaving water temperature range to adequate values
(depending on the heat emitter), such situations can be
avoided.
Example: Set the minimum leaving water temperature to 28°C to
avoid NOT to be able to heat up the room: leaving water
temperatures
MUST
be
sufficiently
higher
than
the
room
temperatures (in heating).
#
Code
Description
Leaving water temperature range for the main leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
highest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
Installer reference guide
57
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.2.2] [9-00]
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~depending on outdoor unit
(default: 55°C)
[A.3.1.1.2.1] [9-01]
Minimum temp (heating)
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
[A.3.1.1.2.4] [9-02]
Maximum temp (cooling)
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
[A.3.1.1.2.3] [9-03]
Minimum temp (cooling)
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Leaving water temperature range for the additional leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
highest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
lowest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
[A.3.1.2.2.2] [9-06]
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~depending on outdoor unit
(default: 55°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.1] [9-05]
Minimum temp (heating)
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.4] [9-08]
Maximum temp (cooling)
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.3] [9-07]
Minimum temp (cooling)
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature
This function defines how much the water temperature may rise
above the desired leaving water temperature before the compressor
stops. The compressor will startup again when the leaving water
temperature drops below the desired leaving water temperature.
This function is ONLY applicable in heating mode.
#
Code
Description
N/A
[9-04]
1°C~4°C (default: 1°C)
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C
In heating operation, the desired leaving water temperature is locally
increased
around
an
outdoor
temperature
of
0°C.
This
compensation can be selected when using an absolute or a weather
dependent desired temperature (see illustration below). Use this
setting to compensate for possible heat losses of the building due to
the evaporation of melted ice or snow (e.g. in cold region countries).
Tt
TA
R
L
0°C
Tt
TA
R
L
0°C
a
b
a
Absolute desired LWT
b
Weather dependent desired LWT
#
Code
Description
N/A
[D-03]
▪ 0 (disabled) (default)
▪ 1 (enabled) L=2°C,
R=4°C (−2°C
Installer reference guide
58
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[A.3.2.4]
N/A
Room temp. step
▪ 1°C (default). The desired room
temperature on the user interface is
settable per 1°C.
▪ 0.5°C. The desired room temperature
on the user interface is settable per
0.5°C. The actual room temperature is
displayed with an accuracy of 0.1°C.
Room temperature hysteresis
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. The hysteresis
band around the desired room temperature is settable. It is
recommended NOT to change the room temperature hysteresis as it
is set for an optimal use of the system.
[9-0C]
a
b
c
d
a
Room temperature
b
Actual room temperature
c
Desired room temperature
d
Time
#
Code
Description
N/A
[9-0C]
1°C~6°C (default: 1°C)
Room temperature offset
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. You can
calibrate the room temperature sensor. It is possible to give an offset
to the room thermistor value measured by the user interface. The
settings can be used to compensate for situations where the user
interface CANNOT be installed on the ideal installation location (see
installation manual and/or installer reference guide).
#
Code
Description
Room temp. offset: Offset on the actual room temperature
measured on the user interface sensor.
[A.3.2.2]
[2-0A]
–5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Room frost protection
Room frost protection prevents the room from getting too cold. This
setting behaves differently depending on the set unit control method
([C‑07]). Perform actions according to the table below:
Unit control method ([C‑07])
Room frost protection
Room thermostat control
([C‑07]=2)
Allow for the room thermostat to
take care of room frost
protection:
▪ Set [2‑06] to "1"
▪ Set
the
room
antifrost
temperature ([2‑05]).
External room thermostat control
([C‑07]=1)
Allow for the external room
thermostat to take care of room
frost protection:
▪ Turn ON the leaving water
temperature home page.
Leaving water temperature
control ([C‑07]=0)
Room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
NOTICE
If the system does NOT contain a backup heater, do NOT
change the default room antifrost temperature.
INFORMATION
If a U4 error occurs, room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
Refer to the sections below for detailed information on room frost
protection in relation to the applicable unit control method.
[C‑07]=2: room thermostat control
Under room thermostat control, room frost protection is guaranteed,
even if the room temperature home page is OFF on the user
interface. When room frost protection ([2‑06]) is enabled and the
room temperature drops below the room antifrost temperature
([2‑05]), the unit will supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat
up the room again.
#
Code
Description
N/A
[2-06]
Room frost protection
▪ 0: disabled
▪ 1: enabled (default)
N/A
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
4°C~16°C (default: 12°C)
INFORMATION
If a U5 error occurs:
▪ when 1 user interface is connected, room frost
protection is NOT guaranteed,
▪ when 2 user interfaces are connected and the second
user interface used for room temperature control is
disconnected (due to miswiring, damage of the cable),
then room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.
NOTICE
If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit is
triggered to start emergency operation, the user interface
will ask confirmation before starting. Room frost protection
is active even if the user does NOT confirm emergency
operation.
[C‑07]=1: external room thermostat control
Under external room thermostat control, room frost protection is
guaranteed by the external room thermostat, provided that the
leaving water temperature home page is ON on the user interface,
and the auto emergency setting ([A.6.C]) is set to "1".
Additionally, limited frost protection by the unit is possible:
Installer reference guide
59
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
In case of…
…then the following applies:
One leaving water temperature
zone
▪ When
the
leaving
water
temperature home page is
OFF and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then
the
unit
will
supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered.
▪ When
the
leaving
water
temperature home page is ON,
the external room thermostat
is "Thermo OFF" and the
outdoor ambient temperature
drops below 4°C, then the unit
will supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
▪ When
the
leaving
water
temperature home page is ON
and
the
external
room
thermostat is "Thermo ON",
then room frost protection is
guaranteed by the normal
logic.
Two leaving water temperature
zones
▪ When
the
leaving
water
temperature home page is
OFF, and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then
the
unit
will
supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered.
▪ When
the
leaving
water
temperature home page is ON,
the
operation
mode
is
"heating", and the outdoor
ambient
temperature
drops
below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
▪ The selection of "cooling" or
"heating" is done via the user
interface. When the leaving
water temperature home page
is ON and the operation mode
is "cooling", then there is no
protection.
[C‑07]=0: leaving water temperature control
Under leaving water temperature control, room frost protection is
NOT guaranteed. However, if [2‑06] is set to "1", limited frost
protection by the unit is possible:
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is OFF and the
outdoor ambient temperature drops below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water temperature setpoint will be lowered.
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "heating", then the unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up the room according to normal logic.
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "cooling", then there is no protection.
Shut-off valve
The following is only applicable in case of 2 leaving water
temperature zones. In case of 1 leaving water temperature zone,
connect the shut-off valve to the heating/cooling output.
The shut-off valve, which is in the main leaving water temperature
zone, output is configurable.
INFORMATION
During defrost operation, the shut-off valve is ALWAYS
opened.
Thermo On/OFF: the valve closes, depending on [F-0B] when there
is no heating demand from the main zone. Enable this setting to:
▪ avoid leaving water supply to the heat emitters in the main LWT
zone (through the mixing valve station) when there is request from
the additional LWT zone.
▪ activate the On/OFF pump of the mixing valve station ONLY when
there is demand. See "5 Application guidelines" on page 10.
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.6.1] [F-0B]
The shut-off valve:
▪ 0 (No)(default): is NOT influenced by
heating or cooling demand.
▪ 1 (Yes): closes when there is NO
heating or cooling demand.
INFORMATION
The setting [F‑0B] is only valid when there is a thermostat
or external room thermostat request setting (NOT in case
of leaving water temperature setting).
Cooling: ONLY applicable for RHBX and RHVX. The shut-off valve
closes, depending on [F-0C] when the unit is running in cooling
operation mode. Enable this setting to avoid cold leaving water
through the heat emitter and the forming of condensation (e.g. under
floor heating loops or radiators).
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.6.2] [F-0C]
The shut-off valve:
▪ 0 (No): is NOT influenced by changing
the space operation mode to cooling.
▪ 1 (Yes)(default): closes when the
space operation mode is cooling.
Operation range
Depending on the average outdoor temperature, the operation of the
unit in space heating or space cooling is prohibited.
Space heating OFF temp: When the averaged outdoor temperature
raises above this value, space heating is turned OFF to avoid
overheating.
#
Code
Description
[A.3.3.1]
[4-02]
▪ RHBH/X04+08 and RHVH/X04+08:
14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
▪ RHBH/X11+16 and RHVH/X11+16:
14°C~35°C (default: 35°C)
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
Space cooling On temp: ONLY applicable for RHBX and RHVX.
When the averaged outdoor temperature drops below this value,
space cooling is turned OFF.
Installer reference guide
60
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[A.3.3.2]
[F-01]
10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
Automatic heating/cooling changeover
ONLY applicable for RHBX and RHVX. The end-user sets the
desired operation mode on the user interface: Heating, Cooling or
Automatic (see also operation manual/user reference guide). When
Automatic is selected, the changing of the operation mode is based
on:
▪ Monthly allowance for heating and/or cooling: the end-user
indicates on a monthly base which operation is allowed ([7.5]: both
heating/cooling or heating ONLY or cooling ONLY). If the allowed
operation mode changes to cooling ONLY, the operation mode
changes to cooling. If the allowed operation mode changes to
heating ONLY, the operation mode changes to heating.
▪ Averaged outdoor temperature: the operation mode will be
changed in order to ALWAYS be within range determined by the
space heating OFF temperature for heating and the space cooling
On temperature for cooling. If the outdoor temperature drops, the
operation mode switches to heating and vice versa. Note that the
outdoor
temperature
will
be
time-averaged
(see
"8 Configuration" on page 45).
When the outdoor temperature is between the space cooling On and
the space heating OFF temperature, the operation mode remains
unchanged unless the system is configured in room thermostat
control with one leaving water temperature zone and quick heat
emitters. In that case, the operation mode will change based on:
▪ Measured indoor temperature: besides the heating and the
cooling desired room temperature, the installer sets a hysteresis
value (e.g. when in heating, this value is related to the desired
cooling temperature) and an offset value (e.g. when in heating,
this value is related to the desired heating temperature). Example:
the desired room temperature in heating is 22°C and in cooling
24°C, with a hysteresis value of 1°C and an offset of 4°C.
Changeover from heating to cooling will occur when the room
temperature rises above the maximum of the desired cooling
temperature added by the hysteresis value (thus 25°C) and the
desired heating temperature added by the offset value (thus
26°C). Oppositely, changeover from cooling to heating will occur
when the room temperature drops below the minimum of the
desired heating temperature subtracted by the hysteresis value
(thus 21°C) and the desired cooling temperature subtracted by the
offset value (thus 20°C).
▪ Guard timer to prevent too frequent changing from heating to
cooling and vice versa.
Changeover settings related to the outdoor temperature (ONLY
when automatic is selected):
#
Code
Description
[A.3.3.1]
[4-02]
Space heating OFF temp. If the outdoor
temperature rises above this value, the
operation mode will change to cooling:
▪ RHBH/X04+08 and RHVH/X04+08:
14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
▪ RHBH/X11+16 and RHVH/X11+16:
14°C~35°C (default: 35°C)
[A.3.3.2]
[F-01]
Space cooling On temp. If the outdoor
temperature drops below this value, the
operation mode will change to heating:
Range: 10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
#
Code
Description
Changeover settings related to the indoor temperature. ONLY
applicable when Automatic is selected and the system is configured
in room thermostat control with 1 leaving water temperature zone
and quick heat emitters.
N/A
[4-0B]
Hysteresis: Ensures that changeover is
ONLY done when necessary. Example:
The space operation mode ONLY
changes from cooling to heating when
the room temperature drops below the
desired heating temperature subtracted
by the hysteresis.
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
1°C)
N/A
[4-0D]
Offset: Ensures that the active desired
room temperature can be reached.
Example: if heating to cooling
changeover would occur below the
desired room temperature in heating, this
desired room temperature could never
be reached.
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
3°C)
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced
Preset tank temperatures
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled
or scheduled + reheat.
You can define preset tank temperatures:
▪ storage economic
▪ storage comfort
▪ reheat
▪ reheat hysteresis
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule. If
you later want to change the value, you only have to do it in 1 place
(see also operation manual and/or user reference guide).
Storage comfort
When programming the schedule, you can make use of the tank
temperatures set as preset values. The tank will then heat up until
these setpoint temperatures have been reached. Additionally, a
storage stop can be programmed. This feature puts a stop to tank
heating even if the setpoint has NOT been reached. Only program a
storage stop when tank heating is absolutely undesirable.
#
Code
Description
[7.4.3.1]
[6-0A]
30°C~[6‑0E]°C (default: 60°C)
Storage eco
The storage economic temperature denotes the lower desired tank
temperature. It is the desired temperature when a storage economic
action is scheduled (preferably during day).
#
Code
Description
[7.4.3.2]
[6-0B]
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Reheat
The desired reheat tank temperature is used:
▪ in reheat mode of scheduled + reheat mode: The guaranteed
minimum tank temperature is set by THP OFF–[6‑08], which is either
[6‑0C] or the weather dependent setpoint, minus the reheat
hysteresis. If the tank temperature drops below this value, the tank
is heated up.
Installer reference guide
61
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
[7.4.3.3]
[6-0C]
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Reheat hysteresis
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled +
reheat.
#
Code
Description
N/A
[6-08]
2°C~20°C (default: 10°C)
Weather dependent
The weather dependent installer settings define the parameters for
the weather dependent operation of the unit. When weather
dependent operation is active the desired tank temperature is
determined automatically depending on the averaged outdoor
temperature: low outdoor temperatures will result in higher desired
tank temperatures as the cold water tap is colder and vice versa. In
case of scheduled or scheduled+reheat domestic hot water
preparation, the storage comfort temperature is weather dependent
(according to the weather dependent curve), the storage economic
and reheat temperature are NOT weather dependent. In case of
reheat only domestic hot water preparation, the desired tank
temperature is weather dependent (according to the weather
dependent curve). During weather dependent operation, the end-
user cannot adjust the desired tank temperature on the user
interface.
#
Code
Description
[A.4.6]
N/A
Weather dependent desired tank
temperature is:
▪ Fixed (default): disabled. All desired
tank temperature are NOT weather
dependent.
▪ Weather dep.: enabled. In scheduled
or
scheduled+reheat
mode,
the
storage
comfort
temperature
is
weather dependent. Storage economic
and reheat temperatures are NOT
weather dependent. In reheat mode,
the
desired
tank
temperature
is
weather dependent.
Note:
When
the
displayed
tank
temperature is weather dependent, it
cannot be adjusted on the user
interface.
#
Code
Description
[A.4.7]
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
[0-0C]
[0-0B]
Weather-dependent curve
TDHW
Ta
[0-0C]
[0-0B]
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
▪ TDHW: The desired tank temperature.
▪ Ta: The (averaged) outdoor ambient
temperature
▪ [0-0E]:
low
outdoor
ambient
temperature:
−40°C~5°C
(default:
−10°C)
▪ [0-0D]:
high
outdoor
ambient
temperature:
10°C~25°C
(default:
15°C)
▪ [0-0C]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
drops
below
the
low
ambient
temperature: 45°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
60°C)
▪ [0-0B]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
rises
above
the
high
ambient
temperature: 35°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
55°C)
Installer reference guide
62
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Booster heater and heat pump operation
#
Code
Description
N/A
[4-03]
Defines the operation permission of the
booster heater depending on ambient,
domestic hot water temperature or
operation mode of heat pump. This
setting is only applicable in reheat mode
for applications with separate domestic
hot water tank.
▪ 0: Booster heater operation is NOT
allowed
except
for
"Disinfection
function"
and
"Powerful
domestic
water heating".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements
of
the
house
and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
If the outdoor temperature is below
setting
[5-03]
and
[5-02]=1,
the
domestic hot water will not be heated.
The domestic hot water temperature
can be maximum the heat pump OFF
temperature.
▪ 1: Booster heater operation is allowed
when required.
▪ 2: The booster heater is allowed
outside the operation range of the heat
pump
for
domestic
hot
water
operation.
Booster heater operation is only
allowed if:
▪ Ambient temperature is out of the
operating
range:
Ta<[5-03]
or
Ta>35°C
▪ Domestic hot water temperature is
2°C lower than the heat pump OFF
temperature.
continued >>
#
Code
Description
N/A
[4-03]
<< continuation
The booster heater will be allowed to
operate when Ta<[5-03] depends of the
status of [5-02].
If bivalent operation is enabled and
permission signal for auxiliary boiler is
ON, the booster heater will be restricted
even when Ta<[5-03]. See [C-02].
▪ 3 (default): The booster heater is
allowed when the heat pump is NOT
active in domestic hot water operation.
Same as setting 1, but simultaneous
heat
pump
domestic
hot
water
operation
and
booster
heater
operation is not allowed.
▪ 4: Booster heater operation is NOT
allowed
except
for
"Disinfection
function".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements
of
the
house
and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
If the outdoor temperature is below
setting
[5-03]
and
[5-02]=1,
the
domestic hot water will not be heated.
The domestic hot water temperature
can be maximum the heat pump OFF
temperature.
When setting [4-03]=1/2/3/4, the booster
heater operation can still be restricted by
the booster heater allowance schedule.
N/A
[7-00]
Overshoot temperature. Temperature
difference above the domestic hot water
set point temperature before the booster
heater is turned OFF. The domestic hot
water tank temperature will increase with
[7-00] above selected temperature
set point.
Range: 0°C~4°C (default: 0°C)
N/A
[7-01]
Hysteresis. Temperature difference
between booster heater ON and booster
heater OFF temperature. The minimum
hysteresis temperature is 2°C.
Range: 2°C~40°C (default: 2°C)
N/A
[6-00]
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump ON temperature.
Range: 2°C~20°C (default: 2°C)
N/A
[6-01]
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump OFF temperature.
Range: 0°C~10°C (default: 2°C)
Example: setpoint (TU)>maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
Installer reference guide
63
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
t
TBH ON
TDHW
THP ON
THP OFF
THP MAX
TU
TBH OFF
[6-01]
[6-00]
[7-00]
[7-01]
TU
= 70°C
[7-00] =
3°C
[6-01] =
2°C
[6-00] =
7°C
HP
BH
HP
5
10
20
30
40
41
48
50
60
71
70
73
BH
Booster heater
HP
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place
TBH OFF
Booster heater OFF temperature (TU+[7-00])
TBH ON
Booster heater ON temperature (TBH OFF−[7-01])
THP MAX
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
THP OFF
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
THP ON
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
TDHW
Domestic hot water temperature
TU
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
t
Time
Example: setpoint (TU)≤maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
t
[6-00]
HP
5
10
20
30
40
43
45
TU=THP OFF
THP MAX
TDHW
THP ON
50
HP
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place
THP MAX
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
THP OFF
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
THP ON
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
TDHW
Domestic hot water temperature
TU
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
t
Time
INFORMATION
The maximum heat pump temperature depends on the
ambient temperature.
Timers for simultaneous request space and domestic hot water
operation
#
Code
Description
N/A
[8-00]
Do not change. (default: 1)
#
Code
Description
N/A
[8-01]
Maximum running time for domestic hot
water operation. Domestic hot water
heating stops even when the target
domestic hot water temperature is NOT
reached. The actual maximum running
time also depends on setting [8-04].
▪ When
system
layout
=
Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
only taken into account if there is a
request for space heating or cooling. If
there is NO request for space heating/
cooling, the tank is heated until the
setpoint has been reached.
▪ When
system
layout
≠
Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
always taken into account.
Range: 5~95 minutes (default: 30)
N/A
[8-02]
Anti-recycling time.
Minimum time between two cycles for
domestic hot water. The actual anti-
recycling time also depends on setting
[8-04].
Range: 0~10 hours (default: 3) (step: 0.5
hour) (only for RHBH/X).
Range: 0~10 hours (default: 0.5) (step:
0.5 hour) (only for RHVH/X).
Remark: The minimum time is 1/2 hour
even when the selected value is 0.
N/A
[8-03]
Booster heater delay timer.
Only for RKHW
Start-up delay time for the booster heater
when domestic hot water mode is active.
▪ When domestic hot water mode is
NOT
active,
the
delay
time
is
20 minutes.
▪ The delay time starts from booster
heater ON temperature.
▪ By adapting the booster heater delay
time versus the maximum running
time, you can find an optimal balance
between the energy efficiency and the
heat up time.
▪ If the booster heater delay time is set
too high, it might take a long time
before the domestic hot water reaches
its set temperature.
▪ The setting [8-03] is only meaningful if
setting [4-03]=1. Setting [4-03]=0/2/3/4
limits the booster heater automatically
in relation to heat pump operation time
in domestic water heating mode.
▪ Make sure that [8-03] is always in
relation with the maximum running
time [8-01].
Range: 20~95 minutes (default: 50).
N/A
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum
running time depending on the outdoor
temperature [4-02] or [F-01].
Range: 0~95 minutes (default: 95).
[8-02]: Anti-recycling time
Installer reference guide
64
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
t
1
0
1
0
[8-01]
[8-02]
[8-00]
1
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
2
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
t
Time
[8-03]: Booster heater delay timer
t
1
0
1
0
1
0
[8-03]
3
4
1
0
1
Booster heater operation (1=active, 0=not active)
2
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
3
Hot water request for booster heater (1=request, 0=no
request)
4
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
t
Time
[8-04]: Additional running time at [4-02]/[F-01]
t
TA
t
TA
0
[8-01]
[5-03]
[4-02]
[8-02]
[8-01]+
[8-04]
0
[8-01]
[F-01]
35°C
[8-02]
[8-01]+
[8-04]
TA
Ambient (outdoor) temperature
t
Time
Anti-recycle time
Maximum running time domestic hot water
Disinfection
Applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank.
The disinfection function disinfects the domestic hot water tank by
periodically heating the domestic hot water to a specific temperature.
CAUTION
The disinfection function settings MUST be configured by
the installer according to the applicable legislation.
#
Code
Description
[A.4.4.2]
[2‑00]
Operation day:
▪ 0: Each day
▪ 1: Monday
▪ 2: Tuesday
▪ 3: Wednesday
▪ 4: Thursday
▪ 5: Friday
▪ 6: Saturday
▪ 7: Sunday
[A.4.4.1]
[2‑01]
Disinfection
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
[A.4.4.3]
[2‑02]
Start time: 00~23:00, step: 1:00.
[A.4.4.4]
[2‑03]
Temperature target:
▪ With
booster
heater:
55°C~80°C,
default: 70°C.
▪ Without booster heater: 60°C (fixed).
[A.4.4.5]
[2‑04]
Duration:
▪ With booster heater: 5~60 minutes,
default: 10 minutes.
▪ Without
booster
heater:
40~60
minutes, default: 40 minutes.
00.00
22.00
24.00
01.00
23.00
t
TDHW
TH
TU
[2-02]
[2-03]
[2-04]
TDHW
Domestic hot water temperature
TU
User set point temperature
TH
High set point temperature [2-03]
t
Time
WARNING
Be aware that the domestic hot water temperature at the
hot water tap will be equal to the value selected in field
setting [2-03] after a disinfection operation.
When the high domestic hot water temperature can be a
potential risk for human injuries, a mixing valve (field
supply) shall be installed at the hot water outlet connection
of the domestic hot water tank. This mixing valve shall
secure that the hot water temperature at the hot water tap
never rise above a set maximum value. This maximum
allowable hot water temperature shall be selected
according to the applicable legislation.
CAUTION
Be sure that the disinfection function start time [A.4.4.3]
with defined duration [A.4.4.5] is NOT interrupted by
possible domestic hot water demand.
Installer reference guide
65
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
CAUTION
The booster heater permission schedule is used to restrict
or allow booster heater operation based on a weekly
program.
Advice:
In
order
to
avoid
unsuccessful
disinfection function, at least allow the booster heater (by
the weekly program) for minimum 4 hours starting from the
scheduled start-up of disinfection. If the booster heater is
restricted during disinfection, this function will NOT be
successful and the applicable warning AH will be
generated.
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
INFORMATION
Disinfection function is restarted in case the domestic hot
water temperature drops 5°C below the disinfection target
temperature within the duration time.
INFORMATION
An AH error occurs if you do the following during
disinfection:
▪ Set the user permission level to Installer.
▪ Go to the DHW tank temperature home page (Tank).
▪ Press to interrupt the disinfection.
8.3.3
Heat source settings
Backup heater
For systems without domestic hot water tank or with separate
domestic hot water tank (only for RHBH/X)
Backup heater operation mode: defines when backup heater
operation is enabled or disabled. This setting is only overruled when
backup heating is required during defrost operation or malfunctioning
of the outdoor unit (when [A.6.C] is enabled).
For systems with an integrated domestic hot water tank (only
for RHVH/X)
Backup heater operation mode: defines when backup heater
operation is disabled or only allowed during domestic hot water
operation. This setting is only overruled when backup heating is
required during defrost operation or malfunctioning of the outdoor
unit (when [A.6.C] is enabled).
#
Code
Description
[A.5.1.1]
[4‑00]
Backup heater operation:
▪ 0: Disabled
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
#
Code
Description
[A.5.1.3]
[4‑07]
Defines whether backup heater second
step is:
▪ 1: Allowed
▪ 0: NOT allowed
In this way it is possible to limit the
backup heater capacity.
N/A
[5-00]
Is backup heater operation allowed
above equilibrium temperature during
space heating operation?
▪ 1: NOT allowed
▪ 0: Allowed
[A.5.1.4]
[5‑01]
Equilibrium temperature.
Outdoor temperature below which
operation of the backup heater is
allowed.
Range: –15°C~35°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
INFORMATION
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
backup heater operation during space heating needs to be
limited but can be allowed for domestic hot water
operation, then set [4‑00] to 2.
INFORMATION
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
the storage temperature set point is higher than 50°C,
ROTEX recommends NOT to disable the backup heater
second step because it will have a big impact on the
required time for the unit to heat up the domestic hot water
tank.
Auto emergency
When the heat pump fails to operate, the backup heater and booster
heater can serve as an emergency heater and either automatically
or non-automatically take over the heat load.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Automatic and a heat pump failure
occurs:
▪ The backup heater will automatically take over the heat load.
▪ The booster heater will automatically take over the domestic hot
water production.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Manual and a heat pump failure
occurs, the domestic hot water and space heating operations will
stop and need to be recovered manually. The user interface will
then ask you to confirm whether the backup heater or booster
heater can take over the heat load or not.
When the heat pump fails,
will appear on the user interface. If the
house is unattended for longer periods, we recommend to set
[A.6.C] Emergency to Automatic.
#
Code
Description
[A.6.C]
N/A
Emergency:
▪ 0: Manual (default)
▪ 1: Automatic
INFORMATION
If [4‑03]=1 or 3, then Emergency=Manual is not applicable
for the booster heater.
INFORMATION
The auto emergency setting can be set in the menu
structure of the user interface only.
Installer reference guide
66
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
INFORMATION
If a heat pump failure occurs and [A.6.C] is set to Manual,
the room frost protection function, the underfloor heating
screed dryout function, and the water pipe antifreeze
function will remain active even if the user does NOT
confirm emergency operation.
Bivalent
Applies only to installations with an auxiliary boiler (alternating
operation, parallel connected). The purpose of this function is to
determine — based on the outdoor temperature (possibility 1) or on
energy prices (possibility 2) — which heating source can/will provide
the space heating, either the indoor unit or an auxiliary boiler.
The field setting "bivalent operation" applies only the indoor unit
space heating operation and the permission signal for the auxiliary
boiler.
Possibility 1
The installer can set a temperature below which the boiler will
always operate when electric prices (High, Medium, Low) are "0" in
the menu structure.
NOTICE
Do NOT use overview settings!
When the "bivalent operation" function is enabled, the indoor unit will
stop automatically in space heating operation when the outdoor
temperature drops below "bivalent ON temperature" and the
permission signal for the auxiliary boiler becomes active.
When the bivalent operation function is disabled, the space heating
by indoor unit is possible at all outdoor temperatures (see operation
ranges) and permission signal for auxiliary boiler is ALWAYS
deactivated.
▪ [C‑03] Bivalent ON temperature: defines the outdoor temperature
below which the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler will be
active (closed, KCR on EKRP1HB) and space heating by indoor
unit will be stopped.
▪ [C‑04] Bivalent hysteresis: defines the temperature difference
between bivalent ON temperature and bivalent OFF temperature.
Permission signal X1–X2 (EKRP1HB)
TA
[C-03]
[C-04]
a
b
TA
Outdoor temperature
a
Closed
b
Open
#
Code
Description
N/A
[C-03]
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
N/A
[C-04]
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
Possibility 2
The installer can set a temperature range ([C‑04]). Depending on the
energy prices, a calculated point Tcalc changes between this range.
#
Code
Description
[7.4.5.1]
N/A
What is the high electricity
price?
[7.4.5.2]
N/A
What is the medium electricity
price?
[7.4.5.3]
N/A
What is the low electricity
price?
#
Code
Description
[7.4.6]
N/A
What is the fuel price?
NOTICE
Do NOT use overview settings!
When TA reaches the Tcalc point, then the bivalent heat source
permission will be active. To prevent too much switching, there is a
hysteresis of 3°C.
▪ [C‑03] ON temperature. Below this temperature, bivalent will
always be ON. Tcalc is ignored.
▪ [C‑04] Operation range between which Tcalc is calculated.
TA
Tcalc
[C-03]+[C-04]
3°C
[C-03]
a
b
TA
Outdoor temperature
Tcalc
Calculated temperature
a
Closed
b
Open
#
Code
Description
N/A
[C-03]
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
N/A
[C-04]
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
It is recommended to choose [C‑04] bigger than the default value to
have an optimal operation when choosing possibility 2. Depending
on the used boiler, the boiler efficiency should be chosen as follows:
#
Code
Description
[A.6.A]
[7‑05]
▪ 0: Very high
▪ 1: High
▪ 2: Medium
▪ 3: Low
▪ 4: Very low
INFORMATION
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([A.2.2.6.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in
menu structure [7.4.5.1], [7.4.5.2] and [7.4.5.3]. Do NOT
use overview settings.
INFORMATION
Boiler efficiency [A.6.A] or [7‑05] becomes visible when
bivalent is ON ([A.2.2.6.1] or [C‑02]).
CAUTION
Make sure to observe all rules mentioned in application
guideline 5 when bivalent operation function is enabled.
ROTEX shall NOT be held liable for any damage resulting
from failure to observe this rule.
Installer reference guide
67
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
INFORMATION
▪ The combination of setting [4‑03]=0/2 with bivalent
operation at low outdoor temperature can result in
domestic hot water shortage.
▪ The bivalent operation function has no impact on the
domestic water heating mode. The domestic hot water
is still and only heated by the indoor unit.
▪ The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is located
on the EKRP1HB (digital I/O PCB). When it is
activated, the contact X1, X2 is closed and open when
it is deactivated. See illustration below for the
schematic location of this contact.
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
X1 X2 X3 X4
OFF ON
X2M
SS1
X1M
8.3.4
System settings
Priorities
For systems with separate domestic hot water tank (only for
RHBH/X)
#
Code
Description
N/A
[5-02]
Space heating priority.
Defines whether domestic hot water is
made by booster heater only when
outdoor temperature is below space
heating priority temperature. It is
recommended to enable this function to
shorten tank heating operation time
and guaranteed domestic hot water
comfort.
▪ 0: disabled
▪ 1: enabled
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
N/A
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
Defines the outdoor temperature which
below the domestic hot water will be
heated by booster heater only.
Range: –15°C~35°C (default: 0°C).
#
Code
Description
N/A
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot
water temperature: set point correction
for the desired domestic hot water
temperature, to be applied at low
outdoor temperature when space
heating priority is enabled. The
corrected (higher) set point will make
sure that the total heat capacity of the
water in the tank remains
approximately unchanged, by
compensating for the colder bottom
water layer of the tank (because the
heat exchanger coil is not operational)
with a warmer top layer.
Range: 0°C~20°C (default: 10°C).
For systems with an integrated domestic hot water tank (only
for RHVH/X)
#
Code
Description
N/A
[5‑02]
Space heating priority.
Defines whether backup heater will
assist the heat pump during domestic
hot water operation.
Consequence: Shorter tank heating
operation time and shorter interruption
of the space heating cycle.
This setting MUST always be 1.
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
If the backup heater operation is limited
([4‑00]=0) and the outdoor temperature
is lower than setting [5‑03], the
domestic hot water will not be heated
with the backup heater.
N/A
[5‑03]
Space heating priority temperature.
Defines the outdoor temperature which
below the backup heater will assist
during domestic hot water heating.
Auto-restart
When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart
function reapplies the remote controller settings at the time of the
power failure. Therefore, it is recommended to always enable the
function.
If the preferential kWh rate power supply is of the type that power
supply is interrupted, always enable the auto restart function.
Continuous indoor unit control can be guaranteed independent of the
preferential kWh rate power supply status, by connecting the indoor
unit to a normal kWh rate power supply.
#
Code
Description
[A.6.1]
[3‑00]
Is the auto restart function of the unit
allowed?
▪ 0: No
▪ 1 (default): Yes
Installer reference guide
68
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Preferential kWh rate power supply
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.6]
[D‑01]
Connection to a preferential kWh rate
power supply:
▪ 0 (default): The outdoor unit is
connected to a normal power supply.
▪ 1: The outdoor unit is connected to a
preferential kWh rate power supply.
When the preferential kWh rate signal
is sent by the electricity company, the
contact will open and the unit will go in
forced off mode. When the signal is
released
again,
the
voltage-free
contact will close and the unit will
restart operation. Therefore, always
enable the auto restart function.
▪ 2: The outdoor unit is connected to a
preferential kWh rate power supply.
When the preferential kWh rate signal
is sent by the electricity company, the
contact will close and the unit will go in
forced off mode. When the signal is
released
again,
the
voltage-free
contact will open and the unit will
restart operation. Therefore, always
enable the auto restart function.
Remark: 3 is related to safety
thermostat.
[A.6.2.1]
[D‑00]
Which heaters are allowed to operate
during preferential kWh rate power
supply?
▪ 0 (default): None
▪ 1: N/A
▪ 2: Backup heater only
▪ 3: N/A
See table below.
Setting 2 is only meaningful if the
preferential kWh rate power supply is of
type 1 or indoor unit is connected to a
normal kWh rate power supply (via
X2M/30-31) and the backup heater is
NOT connected to the preferential kWh
rate power supply.
Only for RHBH/X + RKHW:
[D‑00]
Booster heater
Backup heater
Compressor
0 (default)
Forced OFF
Forced OFF
Forced OFF
1
Permitted
2
Forced OFF
Permitted
3
Permitted
Only for RHVH/X: Do NOT use 1 or 3.
[D‑00]
Backup heater
Compressor
0 (default)
Forced OFF
Forced OFF
2
Allowed
Safety thermostat
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
#
Code
Description
[A.2.1.6]
[D‑01]
Connection to a safety thermostat
voltage free contact:
▪ 0 (default): No safety thermostat.
▪ 3: Safety thermostat normal closed
contact.
Remark: 1+2 are related to preferential
kWh rate power supply.
Power saving function
INFORMATION
Only applicable for RRLQ004~008CAV3.
Defines whether the outdoor unit power supply can be interrupted
(internally by indoor unit control) during stand-still conditions (no
space heating/cooling nor domestic hot water demand). The final
decision to allow power interruption of the outdoor unit during
standstill depends on the ambient temperature, compressor
conditions and minimum internal timers.
To enable the power saving function setting, [E‑08] needs to be
enabled on the user interface in combination with the removal of the
power saving connector at the outdoor unit.
NOTICE
The power saving connector at the outdoor unit shall only
be removed when the main power supply to the application
is switched OFF.
In case of RRLQ004~008CAV3
3×
1 2 3
Installer reference guide
69
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
#
Code
Description
N/A
[E‑08]
Power saving function for outdoor unit:
▪ 0: Disabled
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
In case of RRLQ011~016CAV3 and RRLQ011~016CAW1
Do NOT change the default setting.
#
Code
Description
N/A
[E-08]
Power saving function for outdoor unit:
▪ 0 (default): Disabled
▪ 1: Enabled
Power consumption control
Only
applicable
for
RHBH/X04+08
+
RHVH/X04+08.
See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 10 for detailed information about
this functionality.
Pwr consumpt. control
#
Code
Description
[A.6.3.1]
[4-08]
Mode:
▪ 0 (No limitation)(default): Disabled.
▪ 1 (Continuous): Enabled: You can
set one power limitation value (in A
or kW) to which the system power
consumption will be limited for all the
time.
▪ 2 (Digital inputs): Enabled: You can
set up to four different power
limitation values (in A or kW) to
which
the
system
power
consumption will be limited when the
corresponding digital input asks.
[A.6.3.2]
[4-09]
Type:
▪ 0 (Current): The limitation values are
set in A.
▪ 1 (Power)(default): The limitation
values are set in kW.
[A.6.3.3]
[5-05]
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.4]
[5-09]
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Amp. limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on current values.
[A.6.3.5.1]
[5-05]
Limit DI1
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.5.2]
[5-06]
Limit DI2
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.5.3]
[5-07]
Limit DI3
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.5.4]
[5-08]
Limit DI4
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
kW limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on power values.
[A.6.3.6.1]
[5-09]
Limit DI1
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
#
Code
Description
[A.6.3.6.2]
[5-0A]
Limit DI2
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.3]
[5-0B]
Limit DI3
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.4]
[5-0C]
Limit DI4
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Priority: Only applicable in case of an optional RKHW.
[A.6.3.7]
[4-01]
Power consumption control
DISABLED [4‑08]=0
▪ 0 (None)(default): Backup heater and
booster
heater
can
operate
simultaneously.
▪ 1 (BSH): The booster heater is
prioritized.
▪ 2 (BUH): The backup heater is
prioritized.
Power consumption control
ENABLED [4‑08]=1 or 2
▪ 0 (None)(default): Depending on the
power limitation level, the booster
heater will be limited first, before the
backup heater is limited.
▪ 1 (BSH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the backup heater will
be limited first, before the booster
heater is limited.
▪ 2 (BUH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
Note: In case of power consumption control is DISABLED (for all
models) the setting [4‑01] defines whether backup heater and
booster heater can operate simultaneously, or if the booster heater/
backup heater has priority over the backup heater/booster heater.
In case of power consumption control is ENABLED (only for RHBH/
X04+08 and RHVH/X04+08), the setting [4‑01] defines the priority of
the electrical heaters depending on applicable limitation.
Average timer
The average timer corrects the influence of ambient temperature
variations. The weather-dependent set point calculation is done on
the average outdoor temperature.
The outdoor temperature is averaged over the selected time period.
#
Code
Description
[A.6.4]
[1-0A]
Outdoor average timer:
▪ 0: No averaging (default)
▪ 1: 12 hours
▪ 2: 24 hours
▪ 3: 48 hours
▪ 4: 72 hours
INFORMATION
If the power saving function is activated (see [E‑08]), the
average outdoor temperature calculation is only possible in
case the external outdoor temperature sensor is used. See
"5.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor" on
page 22.
Installer reference guide
70
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Offset temperature external outdoor ambient sensor
Only applicable in case of an external outdoor ambient sensor is
installed and configured.
You can calibrate the external outdoor ambient temperature sensor.
It is possible to give an offset to the thermistor value. The setting can
be used to compensate for situations where the external outdoor
ambient sensor cannot be installed on the ideal installation location
(see installation).
#
Code
Description
[A.6.5]
[2‑0B]
–5°C~5°C, step: 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Forced defrost
You can manually start a defrost operation.
The decision to execute the manual defrost operation is made by the
outdoor unit and depends on ambient and heat exchanger
conditions. When the outdoor unit accepted the forced defrost
operation,
will be displayed on the user interface. If
is NOT
displayed within 6 minutes after forced defrost operation was
enabled, the outdoor unit ignored the forced defrost request.
#
Code
Description
[A.6.6]
N/A
Do you want to start a defrost operation?
Pump operation
When the pump operation function is disabled the pump will stop if
the outdoor temperature is higher than the value set by [4‑02] or if
the outdoor temperature drops below the value set by [F‑01]. When
the pump operation is enabled, the pump operation is possible at all
outdoor temperatures.
#
Code
Description
N/A
[F‑00]
Pump operation:
▪ 0: Disabled if outdoor temperature is
higher than [4‑02] or lower than [F‑01]
depending
on
heating/cooling
operation mode.
▪ 1:
Possible
at
all
outdoor
temperatures.
Pump operation during flow abnormality [F‑09] defines whether the
pump stops at flow abnormality or allow to continue operation when
flow abnormality occurs. This functionality is only valid in specific
conditions where it is preferable to keep the pump active when
Ta<4°C (pump will be activated for 10 minutes and deactivated after
10 minutes). ROTEX shall NOT be held liable for any damage
resulting this functionality.
#
Code
Description
N/A
[F‑09]
Pump continue operation when flow
abnormality:
▪ 0: Pump will be deactivated.
▪ 1: Pump will be activated when
Ta<4°C (10 minutes ON – 10 minutes
OFF)
Pump speed limitation
Pump speed limitation [9‑0D] defines the maximum pump speed. In
normal conditions, the default setting should NOT be modified. The
pump speed limitation will be overruled when the flow rate is in the
range of the minimum flow (error 7H).
#
Code
Description
N/A
[9‑0D]
Pump speed limitation
▪ 0: No limitation.
▪ 1~4: General limitation. There is
limitation
in
all
conditions.
The
required delta T control and comfort
are NOT guaranteed.
▪ 5~8 (default: 6): Limitation when no
actuators. When there is no heating/
cooling output, the pump speed
limitation is applicable. When there is
heating/cooling
output,
the
pump
speed is only determined by delta T in
relation to the required capacity. With
this limitation range, delta T is
possible
and
the
comfort
is
guaranteed.
The maximum values depend on the unit type:
[9-0D]=0
[9-0D]=5
a (kPa)
b (l/min)
a (kPa)
b (l/min)
a (kPa)
b (l/min)
a (kPa)
b (l/min)
[9-0D]=6
[9-0D]=7
[9-0D]=8
a (kPa)
b (l/min)
a
External static pressure
b
Water flow rate
Installer reference guide
71
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
8.4
Menu structure: Overview user settings
< >
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[2]
[6.2]
[6.3]
[6.8]
[7.1]
[7.4]
[7.3]
[3]
[4]
Set time/date
Date
Time
Daylight Saving Time
Clock type
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday mode
Holiday mode
Home
Away
From
Until
Until
From
Use day schedule
Operation mode
Heating
Cooling
Quiet mode
Operation mode
Select schedules
Room temperature
LWT main
LWT additional
Tank temperature
Information
Sensor information
Energy metering
Error handling
User permission level
Actuators
Operation modes
Running hours
Version
Energy metering
Consumed elec.
Produced energy
Error information
Error history
Contact/helpdesk number
Version
User interface
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
User settings
Display
Temperature lock
Set schedules
Preset values
Allowed operation mode
Unit of measurement
Display
Contrast
Backlit LCD time
User profile
Available home pages
Set schedules
Room temp.
LWT main
LWT additional
DHW temp
Booster heater permission
Quiet mode
DHW pump
Preset values
Room temperature
LWT main
Tank temperature
Quiet level
DHW
Set weather dependent
Warning history
[7.7]
Set weather dependent
Main
Additional
[7.7.1]
Main
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
[7.7.2]
Additional
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
Installer reference guide
72
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
8.5
Menu structure: Overview installer settings
[A]
[A.2]
[A.2.1]
[A.2.2]
[A.2.2.6]
[A.3]
[A.3.1]
[A.3.1.1]
[A.3.2]
[A.3.3]
[A.4]
[A.4.4]
[A.5]
[A.5.1]
[A.7]
[A.6]
[A.6.3]
[A.6.2]
Installer settings
Language
System layout
Space operation
Domestic hot water (DHW)
Heat sources
System operation
Commissioning
Overview settings
System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
Space operation
LWT settings
Room thermostat
Operation range
Domestic hot water
Type
Disinfection
Maximum setpoint
SP mode
Weather-dependent curve
Heat sources
Backup heater
System operation
Auto restart
Preferential kWh rate
Pwr consumpt. control
Averaging time
Ext amb. sensor offset
Forced defrost
Commissioning
Test run
UFH screed dryout
Air purge
Actuator test run
Standard
Unit type
Compressor type
Indoor software type
BUH type
Backup heater steps
Forced off contact
Unit control method
Number of LWT zones
Pump operation mode
Power saving possible
User interface location
Options
DHW operation
DHW tank type
Contact type main
Contact type add.
Digital I/O PCB
Demand PCB
External kWh meter
External kWh meter
DHW pump
External sensor
Leaving water
Main
Additional
Delta T source
Room thermostat
Room temp. range
Room temp. offset
Ext. room sensor offset
Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
Space cooling On temp
Disinfection
Disinfection
Operation day
Start time
Temperature target
Duration
Backup heater
Operation mode
Enable BUH step 2
Equilibrium temp.
Prefer. kWh rate PS
Allowed heaters
Forced pump OFF
Pwr consmp ctrl
Mode
Type
Amp. value
Amp. limits for DI
kW value
kW limits for DI
Priority
Digital I/O PCB
Ext. backup heat src
Solar kit
Alarm output
Bottom plate heater
Main
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
Modulated LWT
Shut-off valve
Emitter type
[A.3.1.2] Additional
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
Room temp. step
[A.3.1.3] Delta T source
Heating
Cooling
Emergency
LAN adapter
INFORMATION
Solar kit settings are shown but are NOT applicable for this
unit. Settings shall NOT be used or changed.
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
Installer reference guide
73
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
9
Commissioning
9.1
Overview: Commissioning
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to
commission the system after it is configured.
Typical workflow
Commissioning typically consists of the following stages:
1
Checking the "Checklist before commissioning".
2
Performing an air purge.
3
Performing a test run for the system.
4
If necessary, performing a test run for one or more actuators.
5
If necessary, performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.
9.2
Precautions when commissioning
INFORMATION
During the first running period of the unit, the required
power may be higher than stated on the nameplate of the
unit. This phenomenon is caused by the compressor, that
needs a continuous run time of 50 hours before reaching
smooth operation and stable power consumption.
NOTICE
Before starting up the system, the unit MUST be energised
for at least 2 hours. The crankcase heater needs to heat
up the compressor oil to avoid oil shortage and
compressor breakdown during startup.
NOTICE
NEVER operate the unit without thermistors and/or
pressure sensors/switches. Burning of the compressor
might result.
NOTICE
Do NOT operate the unit until the refrigerant piping is
complete (when operated this way, the compressor will
break).
9.3
Checklist before commissioning
Do NOT operate the system before the following checks are OK:
You read the complete installation instructions, as
described in the installer reference guide.
The indoor unit is properly mounted.
The outdoor unit is properly mounted.
The following field wiring has been carried out according
to this document and the applicable legislation:
▪ Between the local supply panel and the outdoor unit
▪ Between indoor unit and outdoor unit
▪ Between the local supply panel and the indoor unit
▪ Between the indoor unit and the valves (if applicable)
▪ Between the indoor unit and the room thermostat (if
applicable)
▪ Between the indoor unit and the domestic hot water
tank (if applicable)
▪ Between the gas boiler and the local supply panel
(only applicable in case of hybrid system)
The system is properly earthed and the earth terminals
are tightened.
The fuses or locally installed protection devices are
installed according to this document, and have not been
bypassed.
The power supply voltage matches the voltage on the
identification label of the unit.
There are NO loose connections or damaged electrical
components in the switch box.
There are NO damaged components or squeezed
pipes on the inside of the indoor and outdoor units.
Depending on the backup heater type, backup heater
circuit breaker F1B on the switch box is turned ON.
Only for tanks with built-in booster heater:
The booster heater circuit breaker F2B on the
switch box is turned ON.
There are NO refrigerant leaks.
The refrigerant pipes (gas and liquid) are thermally
insulated.
The correct pipe size is installed and the pipes are
properly insulated.
There is NO water leak inside the indoor unit.
The shut-off valves are properly installed and fully open.
The stop valves (gas and liquid) on the outdoor unit are
fully open.
The air purge valve is open (at least 2 turns).
The pressure relief valve purges water when opened.
The minimum water volume is guaranteed in all
conditions. See "To check the water volume" in
"6.4 Preparing water piping" on page 24.
INFORMATION
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([4‑0E]), that disables automatic operation by the unit. At
first installation, setting [4‑0E] is by default set to "1",
meaning automatic operation is disabled. All protective
functions are then disabled. If the user interface home
pages are off, the unit will NOT operate automatically. To
enable automatic operation and the protective functions,
set [4‑0E] to "0".
36 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set [4‑0E] to "0", ending "installer-on-site" mode and
enabling
the
protective
functions.
If
–
after
first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set [4‑0E] to "1" manually.
9.4
Checklist during commissioning
The minimum flow rate during backup heater/defrost
operation is guaranteed in all conditions. See "To check
the water volume and flow rate" in "6.4 Preparing water
piping" on page 24.
To perform an air purge.
To perform a test run.
To perform an actuator test run.
Underfloor screed dryout function
The underfloor screed dryout function is started (if
necessary).
Installer reference guide
74
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate
1
Confirm according to the hydraulic configuration which space
heating loops can be closed due to mechanical, electronic, or
other valves.
2
Close all space heating loops that can be closed (see previous
step).
3
Start the pump test run operation (see "9.4.4 To perform an
actuator test run" on page 75).
4
Go to [6.1.8]:
> Information > Sensor information > Flow rate
to check the flow rate. During pump test run operation, the unit
can operate below this minimum required flow rate.
Bypass valve foreseen?
Yes
No
Modify the bypass valve setting
to reach the minimum required
flow rate + 2 l/min
In case the actual flow rate is
below the minimum flow rate,
modifications at the hydraulic
configuration are required.
Increase the space heating loops
that can NOT be closed or install
a pressure‑controlled bypass
valve.
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
04+08 models
12 l/min
11+16 models
15 l/min
9.4.2
Air purge function
When commissioning and installing the unit, it is very important to
remove all air in the water circuit. When the air purge function is
running, the pump operates without actual operation of the unit and
the removal of air in the water circuit will start.
NOTICE
Before starting the air purge, open the safety valve and
check if the circuit is sufficiently filled with water. Only if
water escapes the valve after opening it, you can start the
air purge procedure.
There are 2 modes for purging air:
▪ Manually: the unit will operate with a fixed pump speed and in a
fixed or custom position of the 3-way valve. The custom position
of the 3-way valve is a helpful feature to remove all air from the
water circuit in the space heating or the domestic hot water
heating mode. The operation speed of the pump (slow or quick)
can also be set.
▪ Automatic: the unit automatically changes the pump speed and
the position of the 3-way valve between the space heating or the
domestic hot water heating mode.
Typical workflow
Purging the air from the system should consist of:
1
Performing a manual air purge
2
Performing an automatic air purge
INFORMATION
Start by performing a manual air purge. When almost all
the air is removed, perform an automatic air purge. If
necessary, repeat performing the automatic air purge until
you are sure that all air is removed from the system.
During air purge function, pump speed limitation [9‑0D] is
NOT applicable.
Make sure that the leaving water temperature home page, room
temperature home page, and domestic hot water home page are
turned OFF.
The air purge function automatically stops after 30 minutes.
To perform a manual air purge
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 46.
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
> Installer settings >
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
3
Select Manual and press
.
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
Result: The manual air purge starts and the following screen
appears.
01:18
Tue
Air purge
l/min
Low
SHC
0.5
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
Stop
Adjust
Scroll
5
Use the and buttons to scroll to Speed.
6
Use the and buttons to set the desired pump speed.
Result: Low
Result: High
7
If applicable, set the desired position of the 3-way valve (space
heating/domestic hot water)(space heating/domestic hot water).
Use the and buttons to scroll to Circuit.
8
Use the and buttons to set the desired position of the 3-way
valve (space heating/domestic hot water).
Result: SHC
Result: Tank
To perform an automatic air purge
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 46.
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
> Installer settings >
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
3
Select Automatic and press
.
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
Result: Air purging will start and the following screen will be
shown.
01:18
Tue
Air purge
l/min
Low
SHC
0.5
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
Stop
Adjust
Scroll
To interrupt air purge
1
Press
and press
to confirm the interruption of the air
purge function.
Installer reference guide
75
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
9.4.3
To perform a test run
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 46.
2
Go to [A.7.1]:
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Test
run.
3
Select a test and press
. Example: Heating.
4
Select OK and press
.
Result: The test run starts. It stops automatically when done
(±30 min). To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
INFORMATION
If 2 user interfaces are present, you can start a test run
from both user interfaces.
▪ The user interface used to start the test run displays a
status screen.
▪ The other user interface displays a "busy" screen. You
cannot use the user interface as long as the "busy"
screen is shown.
If the installation of the unit has been done correctly, the unit will
start up during test operation in the selected operation mode. During
the test mode, the correct operation of the unit can be checked by
monitoring leaving water temperature (heating/cooling mode) and
tank temperature (domestic hot water mode).
To monitor the temperature, go to [A.6] and select the information
you want to check.
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run
Purpose of the actuator test run is to confirm the operation of the
different actuators (e.g., when you select pump operation, a test run
of the pump will start).
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 46.
2
Make sure the room temperature control, the leaving water
temperature control and the domestic hot water control are
turned OFF via the user interface.
3
Go to [A.7.4]:
> Installer settings > Commissioning >
Actuator test run.
4
Select an actuator and press
. Example: Pump.
5
Select OK and press
.
Result: The actuator test run starts. It automatically stops when
finished. To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
Possible actuator test runs
▪ Booster heater test
▪ Backup heater (step 1) test
▪ Backup heater (step 2) test
▪ Pump test
INFORMATION
Make sure that all air is purged before executing the test
run. Also avoid disturbances in the water circuit during the
test run.
▪ 2-way valve test
▪ 3-way valve test
▪ Bottom plate heater test
▪ Bivalent signal test
▪ Alarm output test
▪ Cooling/heating signal test
▪ Quick heat-up test
▪ Circulation pump test
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout
This function is used for drying out the screed of an underfloor
heating system very slowly during the construction of a house. It
allows the installer to program and execute this program.
Make sure that the leaving water temperature home page, room
temperature home page, and domestic hot water home page are
turned OFF.
This function can be executed without finishing the outdoor
installation. In this case, the backup heater will perform the screed
dryout and supply the leaving water without heat pump operation.
When no outdoor unit is installed yet, then connect the main power
supply cable to the indoor unit via X2M/30 and X2M/31. See
"7.9.7 To connect the main power supply" on page 40.
INFORMATION
▪ If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit
is triggered to start emergency operation, the user
interface will ask confirmation before starting. The
underfloor heating screed dryout function is active even
if the user does NOT confirm emergency operation.
▪ During underfloor heating screed dryout, pump speed
limitation [9‑0D] is NOT applicable.
NOTICE
The installer is responsible for:
▪ contacting the screed manufacturer for the initial
heating instructions to avoid cracking the screed,
▪ programming the underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule according to the above instruction of the
screed manufacturer,
▪ checking the proper functioning of the setup on a
regular basis,
▪ selecting the correct program complying with the type
of the used screed of the floor.
NOTICE
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout, room frost
protection needs to be disabled ([2‑06]=0). By default, it is
enabled ([2‑06]=1). However, due to the "installer-on-site"
mode (see "Checklist before commissioning"), room frost
protection will be automatically disabled for 36 hours after
the first power-on.
If the screed dryout still needs to be performed after the
first 36 hours of power-on, manually disable room frost
protection by setting [2‑06] to "0", and KEEP it disabled
until the screed dryout has finished. Ignoring this notice will
result in cracking of the screed.
10 Hand-over to the user
Installer reference guide
76
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
NOTICE
For the underfloor heating screed dryout to be able to start,
make sure the following settings are met:
▪ [4‑00]=1
▪ [C‑02]=0
▪ [D‑01]=0
▪ [4‑08]=0
▪ [4‑01]≠1
The installer can program up to 20 steps. For each step he needs to
enter:
1
the duration in hours, up to 72 hours,
2
the desired leaving water temperature.
Example:
t
T
A1
25°C (1)
35°C (2)
24h (1)
36h (2)
T
Desired leaving water temperature (15~55°C)
t
Duration (1~72 h)
(1)
Action step 1
(2)
Action step 2
To program an underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 46.
2
Go to [A.7.2]:
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
screed dryout > Set dryout schedule.
3
Use the
,
,
, and
to program the schedule.
▪ Use
and
to scroll through the schedule.
▪ Use
and
to adjust the selection.
If a time is selected, you can set the duration between 1 and
72 hours.
If a temperature is selected, you can set the desired leaving
water temperature between 15°C and 55°C.
4
To add a new step, select "–h" or "–" on an empty line and
press
.
5
To delete a step, set the duration to "–" by pressing
.
6
Press
to save the schedule.
It is important that there is no empty step in the program.
The schedule will stop when a blank step is programmed
OR when 20 consecutive steps have been executed.
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout
INFORMATION
Preferential kWh rate power supply cannot be used in
combination with underfloor heating screed dryout.
Prerequisite: Make sure there is ONLY 1 user interface connected
to your system to perform an underfloor heating screed dryout.
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Go to [A.7.2]:
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
screed dryout.
2
Set a dryout program.
3
Select Start dryout and press
.
4
Select OK and press
.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout starts and following
screen will be shown. It stops automatically when done. To stop it
manually, press
, select OK and press
.
15:10
1
14d 12h
25°C
Tue
Screed dryout
Current step
Remaining
Desired LWT
Stop
To readout the status of an underfloor heating
screed dryout
1
Press
.
2
The current step of the program, the total remaining time, and
the current desired leaving water temperature will be displayed.
INFORMATION
There is limited access to the menu structure. Only the
following menus can be accessed:
▪ Information.
▪ Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH screed
dryout.
To interrupt an underfloor heating screed dryout
When the program is stopped by an error, an operation switch off, or
a power failure, the U3 error will be displayed on the user interface.
To resolve the error codes, see "12.4 Solving problems based on
error codes" on page 80. To reset the U3 error, your User
permission level needs to be Installer.
1
Go to the underfloor heating screed dryout screen.
2
Press
.
3
Press
to interrupt the program.
4
Select OK and press
.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout program is stopped.
When the program is stopped due to an error, an operation switch-
off, or a power failure, you can read out the underfloor heating
screed dryout status.
5
Go to [A.7.2]:
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
screed dryout > Dryout status > Stopped at and followed by the
last executed step.
6
Modify and restart the execution of the program.
10
Hand-over to the user
Once the test run is finished and the unit operates properly, please
make sure the following is clear for the user:
▪ Fill in the installer setting table (in the operation manual) with the
actual settings.
▪ Make sure that the user has the printed documentation and ask
him/her to keep it for future reference. Inform the user that he can
find the complete documentation on the url as earlier described in
this manual.
▪ Explain the user how to properly operate the system and what to
do in case of problems.
▪ Show the user what to do in relation to maintaining the unit.
11 Maintenance and service
Installer reference guide
77
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ Explain the user about energy saving tips as described in the
operation manual.
11
Maintenance and service
NOTICE
Maintenance must be done by an authorised installer or
service agent.
We recommend to do maintenance at least once a year.
However, applicable legislation might require shorter
maintenance intervals.
NOTICE
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
11.1
Overview: Maintenance and
service
This chapter contains information about:
▪ The yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit
▪ The yearly maintenance of the indoor unit
11.2
Maintenance safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
NOTICE: Risk of electrostatic discharge
Before performing any maintenance or service work, touch
a metal part of the unit in order to eliminate static electricity
and to protect the PCB.
11.2.1
Opening the indoor unit
See "7.2.4 To open the switch box cover of the indoor unit" on
page 29.
11.3
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the outdoor unit
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Outdoor unit heat exchanger.
The heat exchanger of the outdoor unit can get blocked up due to
dust, dirt, leaves, etc. It is recommended to clean the heat
exchanger yearly. A blocked heat exchanger can lead to too low
pressure or too high pressure leading to worse performance.
11.4
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the indoor unit
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Water pressure
▪ Water filter
▪ Water pressure relief valve
▪ Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank
▪ Switch box
▪ Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
Water pressure
Check whether the water pressure is above 1 bar. If it is lower, add
water.
Water filter
Clean the water filter.
NOTICE
Handle the water filter with care. Do NOT use excessive
force when you reinsert the water filter so as NOT to
damage the water filter mesh.
1
3
2
5
4
Water pressure relief valve
Open the valve and check if it operates correctly. The water may be
very hot!
Checkpoints are:
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does NOT contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush the system and install an additional water filter (a
magnetic cyclone filter is preferable).
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Relief valve of the domestic hot water tank (field supply)
Open the valve and check the correct operation. Water may be very
hot!
Checkpoints are:
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does not contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush and clean the complete tank, including the piping between
the relief valve and cold water inlet.
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Switch box
▪ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look
for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
Installer reference guide
78
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
▪ Using an ohmmeter, check if contactors K1M, K2M, K3M and K5M
(depending on your installation) operate correctly. All contacts of
these contactors must be in open position when the power is
turned OFF.
WARNING
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons.
Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
INFORMATION
Only for wall-mounted units equipped with a domestic hot
water tank with a built-in electrical booster heater (RKHW).
It is recommended to remove lime buildup on the booster heater to
extend its life span, especially in regions with hard water. To do so,
drain the domestic hot water tank, remove the booster heater from
the domestic hot water tank and immerse in a bucket (or similar) with
lime-removing product for 24 hours.
12
Troubleshooting
12.1
Overview: Troubleshooting
This chapter describes what you have to do in case of problems.
It contains information about:
▪ Solving problems based on symptoms
▪ Solving problems based on error codes
Before troubleshooting
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for
obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
12.2
Precautions when troubleshooting
WARNING
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of
the unit, always make sure that the unit is disconnected
from the mains. Turn off the respective circuit breaker.
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and
find out why the safety device was activated before
resetting it. NEVER bridge safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default
setting. If you are unable to find the cause of the
problem, call your dealer.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
WARNING
Prevent hazard due to the inadvertent resetting of the
thermal cut-out: this appliance must NOT be supplied
through an external switching device, such as a timer, or
connected to a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF
by the utility.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
12.3
Solving problems based on
symptoms
12.3.1
Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or
cooling as expected
Possible causes
Corrective action
The temperature setting is NOT
correct
Check the temperature setting on
the remote controller. Refer to
the operation manual.
The water flow is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ All shut-off valves of the water
circuit are completely open.
▪ The water filter is clean. Clean
if necessary.
▪ There is no air in the system.
Purge air if necessary. You
can purge air manually (see
"To perform a manual air
purge" on page 74) or use the
automatic air purge function
(see "To perform an automatic
air purge" on page 74).
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
▪ The resistance in the water
circuit is NOT too high for the
pump (see the ESP curve in
the "Technical data" chapter).
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer. In
some cases, it is normal that the
unit decides to use a low water
flow.
The water volume in the
installation is too low
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is above the
minimum required value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 25).
12.3.2
Symptom: The compressor does NOT
start (space heating or domestic water
heating)
Possible causes
Corrective action
The unit must start up out of its
operation range (the water
temperature is too low)
If the water temperature is too
low, the unit uses the backup
heater to reach the minimum
water temperature first (15°C).
Check and make sure that:
▪ The power supply to the
backup heater is correctly
wired.
▪ The backup heater thermal
protector is NOT activated.
▪ The backup heater contactors
are NOT broken.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer.
Installer reference guide
79
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Possible causes
Corrective action
The preferential kWh rate power
supply settings and electrical
connections do NOT match
This should match with the
connections as explained in
"6.5 Preparing electrical
wiring" on page 27 and "7.9.7 To
connect the main power
supply" on page 40.
The preferential kWh rate signal
was sent by the electricity
company
Wait for the power to return (2
hours max.).
12.3.3
Symptom: The pump is making noise
(cavitation)
Possible causes
Corrective action
There is air in the system
Purge air manually (see "To
perform a manual air purge" on
page 74) or use the automatic air
purge function (see "To perform
an automatic air purge" on
page 74).
The water pressure at the pump
inlet is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The manometer is not broken.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
▪ The pre-pressure setting of the
expansion vessel is correct
(see "6.4.4 Changing the pre-
pressure of the expansion
vessel" on page 26).
12.3.4
Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens
Possible causes
Corrective action
The expansion vessel is broken
Replace the expansion vessel.
The water volume in the
installation is too high
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is below the
maximum allowed value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 25 and
"6.4.4 Changing the pre-pressure
of the expansion vessel" on
page 26).
The water circuit head is too high The water circuit head is the
difference in height between the
indoor unit and the highest point
of the water circuit. If the indoor
unit is located at the highest
point of the installation, the
installation height is considered
0 m. The maximum water circuit
head is 10 m.
Check the installation
requirements.
12.3.5
Symptom: The water pressure relief valve
leaks
Possible causes
Corrective action
Dirt is blocking the water
pressure relief valve outlet
Check whether the pressure
relief valve works correctly by
turning the red knob on the valve
counterclockwise:
▪ If you do NOT hear a clacking
sound, contact your dealer.
▪ If the water keeps running out
of the unit, close both the
water inlet and outlet shut-off
valves first and then contact
your dealer.
12.3.6
Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently
heated at low outdoor temperatures
Possible causes
Corrective action
The backup heater operation is
not activated
Check and make sure that:
▪ The backup heater operation
mode is enabled. Go to:
▪ [A.5.1.1] > Installer settings
> Heat sources > Backup
heater > Operation mode
[4‑00]
▪ The backup heater overcurrent
fuse has not been turned off. If
it has, check the fuse and turn
it back on.
▪ The thermal protector of the
backup heater has not been
activated. If it has, check the
following, and then press the
reset button in the switch box:
▪ The water pressure
▪ Whether there is air in the
system
▪ The air purge operation
The backup heater equilibrium
temperature has not been
configured correctly
Increase the "equilibrium
temperature" to activate the
backup heater operation at a
higher outdoor temperature. Go
to:
▪ [A.5.1.4] > Installer settings >
Heat sources > Backup heater
> Equilibrium temp. OR
▪ [A.8] > Installer settings >
Overview settings [5‑01]
There is air in the system.
Purge air manually or
automatically. See the air purge
function in the "Commissioning"
chapter.
Installer reference guide
80
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Possible causes
Corrective action
Too much heat pump capacity is
used for heating domestic hot
water (applies only to
installations with a domestic hot
water tank)
Check and make sure that the
"space heating priority" settings
have been configured
appropriately:
▪ Make sure that the "space
heating priority status" has
been enabled. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑02]
▪ Increase the "space heating
priority
temperature"
to
activate
backup
heater
operation at a higher outdoor
temperature. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑03]
12.3.7
Symptom: The pressure at the tapping
point is temporarily unusually high
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief
valve.
▪ Flush and clean the complete
tank
including
the
piping
between pressure relief valve
and the cold water inlet.
▪ Replace the pressure relief
valve.
12.3.8
Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed
away due to a swollen tank
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief
valve.
Contact your local dealer.
12.3.9
Symptom: Tank disinfection function is
NOT completed correctly (AH-error)
Possible causes
Corrective action
The disinfection function was
interrupted by domestic hot water
tapping
Program the start-up of the
disinfection function when the
coming 4 hours NO domestic hot
water tapping is expected.
Large domestic hot water tapping
happened recently before the
programmed start-up of the
disinfection function
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Reheat or Reheat +
sched. is selected, it is
recommended to program the
start-up the disinfection function
at least 4 hours later than the last
expected large hot water tapping.
This start-up can be set by
installer settings (disinfection
function).
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Scheduled only is
selected, it is recommended to
program a Storage eco 3 hours
before the scheduled start-up of
the disinfection function to
preheat the tank.
Possible causes
Corrective action
The disinfection operation was
stopped manually: with the user
interface displaying the DHW
home page and its user
permission level set to Installer,
the
button was pressed
during disinfection operation.
Do NOT press the
button
while the disinfection function is
active.
12.4
Solving problems based on error
codes
When a problem happens, an error code appears on the user
interface. It is important to understand the problem and to take
countermeasure before resetting the error code. This should be
done by a licensed installer or by your local dealer.
This chapter gives you an overview of all error codes and the
content of the error code as it appears on the user interface.
For a more detailed troubleshooting guideline for each error, please
see the service manual.
12.4.1
Error codes: Overview
Error codes of the outdoor unit
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
A5
00
OU: High pressure cooling/Peak
cut/ freeze protection problem.
Please contact your dealer.
E1
00
OU: PCB defect.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
E3
00
OU: Actuation of high pressure
switch (HPS).
Please contact your dealer.
E5
00
OU: Overheat of inverter
compressor motor.
Please contact your dealer.
E6
00
OU: Compressor startup defect.
Please contact your dealer.
E7
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor
unit fan motor.
Please contact your dealer.
E8
00
OU: Power input overvoltage.
Please contact your dealer.
EA
00
OU: Cool/heat switchover
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
H0
00
OU: Voltage/current sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
H3
00
OU: Malfunction of high
pressure switch (HPS)
Please contact your dealer.
Installer reference guide
81
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
H6
00
OU: Malfunction of position
detection sensor.
Please contact your dealer.
H8
00
OU: Malfunction of compressor
input (CT) system.
Please contact your dealer.
H9
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor
air thermistor.
Please contact your dealer.
F3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe temperature.
Please contact your dealer.
F6
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure
in cooling.
Please contact your dealer.
FA
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure,
actuation of HPS.
Please contact your dealer.
JA
00
OU: Malfunction of high
pressure sensor.
Please contact your dealer.
J3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe thermistor.
Please contact your dealer.
J6
00
OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor.
Please contact your dealer.
L3
00
OU: Electrical box temperature
rise problem.
Please contact your dealer.
L4
00
OU: Malfunction of inverter
radiating fin temperature rise.
Please contact your dealer.
L5
00
OU: Inverter instantaneous
overcurrent (DC).
Please contact your dealer.
P4
00
OU: Malfunction of radiating
fin temperature sensor.
Please contact your dealer.
U0
00
OU: Shortage of refrigerant.
Please contact your dealer.
U2
00
OU: Defect of power supply
voltage.
Please contact your dealer.
U7
00
OU: Transmission malfunction
between main CPU- INV CPU.
Please contact your dealer.
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
UA
00
OU: Indoor/outdoor combination
problem.
Power reset required.
Error codes of the indoor unit
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
01
Water flow problem.
7H
04
Water flow problem during
domestic hot water production.
Manual reset.
Check the domestic hot water
circuit.
7H
05
Water flow problem during
heating/sampling.
Manual reset.
Check the space heating/cooling
circuit.
7H
06
Water flow problem during
cooling/defrost.
Manual reset.
Check the plate heat exchanger.
80
00
Returning water temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
81
00
Leaving water temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
89
01
Heat exchanger frozen.
89
02
Heat exchanger frozen.
89
03
Heat exchanger frozen.
8F
00
Abnormal increase outlet
water temperature (DHW).
8H
00
Abnormal increase outlet
water temperature.
8H
03
Overheating water circuit
(thermostat).
A1
00
Zero cross detection problem.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
Installer reference guide
82
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
A1
01
EEPROM reading error.
AA
01
Backup heater overheated.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
AC
00
Booster heater overheated.
Please contact your dealer.
AH
00
Tank disinfection function not
completed correctly.
AJ
03
Too long DHW heat-up time
required.
C0
00
Flow sensor/switch malfunction.
Please contact your dealer.
C4
00
Heat exchanger temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
CJ
02
Room temperature sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
EC
00
Abnormal increase tank
temperature.
H1
00
External temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
HC
00
Tank temperature sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
U3
00
Under floor heating screed
dryout function not completed
correctly.
U4
00
Indoor/outdoor unit
communication problem.
U5
00
User interface
communication problem.
U8
01
Connection with adapter lost
Please contact your dealer.
UA
00
Indoor unit, outdoor unit
matching problem.
Power reset required.
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
UA
17
Tank type problem
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
NOTICE
When the minimum water flow is lower than described in
the table below, the unit will temporarily stop operation and
the user interface will display error 7H‑01. After some time,
this error will reset automatically and the unit will resume
operation.
Minimum required flow during heat pump operation
04 models
Heating
6 l/min
Cooling
6 l/min
08 models
Heating
6 l/min
Cooling
10 l/min
11 models
Heating
10 l/min
Cooling
15 l/min
16 models
Heating
10 l/min
Cooling
15 l/min
Minimum required flow during defrost operation
04+08 models
12 l/min
11+16 models
15 l/min
Minimum required flow during backup heater operation
All models
12 l/min
If the 7H‑01 error persists, the unit will stop operation and the user
interface will display an error code that needs to be reset manually.
Depending on the problem, this error code is different:
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
04
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during domestic hot
water operation. Check the
domestic hot water circuit.
7H
05
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during space heating
operation. Check the space
heating circuit.
Installer reference guide
83
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
06
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during cooling/defrost
operation. Check the space
heating/cooling circuit.
Additionally, this error code might
be an indication of frost damage
to the plate heat exchanger. In
that case, contact your local
dealer.
INFORMATION
Error AJ-03 is reset automatically from the moment there is
a normal tank heat-up.
13
Disposal
NOTICE
Do not try to dismantle the system yourself: the dismantling
of the system, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and other
parts must comply with applicable legislation. Units must
be treated at a specialised treatment facility for reuse,
recycling and recovery.
13.1
Overview: Disposal
Typical workflow
Disposing of the system typically consists of the following stages:
1
Pumping down the system.
2
Bringing the system to a specialized treatment facility.
INFORMATION
For more details, see the service manual.
13.2
To pump down
Example: To protect the environment, pump down when relocating
the unit or when disposing of the unit.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
NOTICE
During pump down operation, stop the compressor before
removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still
running and the stop valve is open during pump down, air
will be sucked into the system. Compressor breakage and
other injury will be the result due to abnormal pressure in
the refrigerant cycle.
Pump down operation will extract all refrigerant from the system into
the outdoor unit.
1
Remove the valve lid from the liquid stop valve and the gas stop
valve.
2
Carry out the forced cooling operation.
3
After 5 to 10 minutes (after only 1 or 2 minutes in case of very
low ambient temperatures (<−10°C)), close the liquid stop valve
with a hexagonal wrench.
4
Check with the manifold if the vacuum is reached.
5
After 2-3 minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop forced
cooling operation.
a
c
b
d
d
e
a
Gas stop valve
b
Closing direction
c
Hexagonal wrench
d
Valve lid
e
Liquid stop valve
13.3
To start and stop forced cooling
Confirm that DIP switch SW2 is in COOL mode.
1
Press the forced cooling operation switch SW1 to begin forced
cooling.
2
Press the forced cooling operation switch SW1 to stop forced
cooling.
SW1
HEAT
COOL
SW2
NOTICE
Take care that while running forced cooling operation, the
water
temperature
remains
higher
than
5°C
(see
temperature read out of the indoor unit). You can achieve
this, for example, by activating all fans of the fan coil units.
14 Technical data
Installer reference guide
84
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
14
Technical data
14.1
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit
(6.4 CuT)
(15.9 CuT)
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
12.7CuT
12.7CuT
7.9CuT
6.4CuT
12.7CuT
12.7CuT
12.7CuT
12.7CuT
6.4CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
4.0CuT
4.0CuT
4.0CuT
4.0CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
7.9CuT
6.4CuT
6.4CuT
M
P
P >
6.4CuT
3TW60815-1
OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE
THERMISTOR
HEAT EXCHANGER
HEAT
EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR
CAPILLARY TUBE 1
CAPILLARY TUBE 2
CAPILLARY TUBE 3
CAPILLARY TUBE 4
REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
HEATING
FIELD PIPING
FIELD PIPING
LIQUID
STOP VALVE
GAS STOP VALVE
WITH SERVICE PORT
FILTER
FILTER
MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER
PROPELLER FAN
PRESSURE
SENSOR
MUFFLER
WITH
FILTER
HIGH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
MUFFLER
MUFFLER
DISCHARGE PIPE
THERMISTOR
COMPRESSOR
ACCUMULATOR
14 Technical data
Installer reference guide
85
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
14.2
Piping diagram: Indoor unit
R2T
R1T
R3T
R4T
3D088485
R4T
R3T
R2T
R1T
Water
inlet
Field installed
Field installed
Shut-off valve
with drain/fill valve
Refrigerant side
Water
outlet
Pump
Manometer
Water side
Shut-off valve
with drain/fill valve
Filter
Plate heat
exchanger
Refrigerant inlet
Refrigerant outlet
Evaporator
Condenser
Refrigerant inlet
Refrigerant outlet
Backup heater
Flow sensor
Air purge
Expansion vessel
Check valve
Flare connection
Screw connection
Flange connection
Brazed connection
Quick coupling
LEGEND
Pinched pipe
Spinned pipe
Thermistor
Description
Inlet water thermistor
Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
Outlet water backup heater thermistor
Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
Safety
valve
14 Technical data
Installer reference guide
86
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
14.3
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the top plate). The abbreviations used are listed below.
C110~C112
Capacitor
DB1, DB2, DB401
Rectifier bridge
DC_N1, DC_N2
Connector
DC_P1, DC_P2
Connector
DCP1, DCP2,
Connector
DCM1, DCM2
Connector
DP1, DP2
Connector
E1, E2
Connector
E1H
Drain pan heater
FU1~FU5
Fuse
HL1, HL2, HL402
Connector
HN1, HN2, HN402
Connector
IPM1
Intelligent power module
L
Live
LED 1~LED 4
Indication lamps
LED A, LED B
Pilot lamp
M1C
Compressor motor
M1F
Fan motor
MR30, MR306,
MR307, MR4
Magnetic relay
MRM10, MRM20
Magnetic relay
MR30_A, MR30_B
Connector
N
Neutral
PCB1
Printed circuit board (main)
PCB2
Printed circuit board (inverter)
PCB3
Printed circuit board (service)
Q1DI
Earth leakage circuit breaker
Q1L
Overload protector
R1T
Thermistor (discharge)
R2T
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
R3T
Thermistor (air)
S1NPH
Pressure sensor
S1PH
High pressure switch
S2~S503
Connector
SA1
Surge arrestor
SHEET METAL
Terminal strip on fixed plate
SW1, SW3
Push buttons
SW2, SW5
DIP switches
U
Connector
V
Connector
V2, V3, V401
Varistor
W
Connector
X11A, X12A
Connector
X1M, X2M
Terminal strip
Y1E
Electronic expansion valve coil
Y1R
Reversing solenoid valve coil
Z1C~Z4C
Ferrite core
Field wiring
Terminal strip
Connector
Terminal
Protective earth
BLK
Black
BLU
Blue
BRN
Brown
GRN
Green
ORG
Orange
PPL
Purple
RED
Red
WHT
White
YLW
Yellow
14.4
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the indoor unit switch box cover). The abbreviations used are listed
below.
Notes to go through before starting the unit
English
Translation
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
X1M
Main terminal
X2M
Field wiring terminal for AC
X5M
Field wiring terminal for DC
X6M, X7M
Backup heater terminal
X4M
Booster heater terminal
Earth wiring
15
Wire number 15
Field supply
**/12.2
Connection ** continues on page
12 column 2
1
Several wiring possibilities
Option
English
Translation
Not mounted in switch box
Wiring depending on model
PCB
Backup heater configuration
(only for *9W)
Backup heater configuration
(only for *9W)
3V3 (1N~, 230 V, 3 kW)
3V3 (1N~, 230 V, 3 kW)
6V3 (1N~, 230 V, 6 kW)
6V3 (1N~, 230 V, 6 kW)
6WN (3N~, 400 V, 6 kW)
6WN (3N~, 400 V, 6 kW)
9WN (3N~, 400 V, 9 kW)
9WN (3N~, 400 V, 9 kW)
6T1 (3~, 230 V, 6 kW)
6T1 (3~, 230 V, 6 kW)
User installed options
User installed options
Bottom plate heater
Bottom plate heater
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water tank with
solar connection
Domestic hot water tank with
solar connection
14 Technical data
Installer reference guide
87
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
English
Translation
Remote user interface
Remote user interface
Ext. indoor thermistor
External indoor thermistor
Ext outdoor thermistor
External outdoor thermistor
Digital I/O PCB
Digital I/O PCB
Demand PCB
Demand PCB
Solar pump and control station
Solar pump and control station
Main LWT
Main leaving water temperature
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
Add LWT
Additional leaving water
temperature
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
Position in switch box
English
Translation
Position in switch box
Position in switch box
Legend
A1P
Main PCB
A2P
User interface PCB
A3P
*
Solar pump station PCB
A3P
*
On/OFF thermostat (PC=power circuit)
A3P
*
Heat pump convector
A4P
*
Digital I/O PCB
A4P
*
Receiver PCB (Wireless On/OFF
thermostat)
A5P
Anode driver PCB
A8P
*
Demand PCB
B1L
Flow sensor
BSK (A3P)
*
Solar pump station relay
DS1 (A8P)
*
DIP switch
E1A
Electrical anode
E1H
Backup heater element (1 kW)
E2H
Backup heater element (2 kW)
E3H
Backup heater element (3 kW)
E4H
*
Booster heater (3 kW)
F1B
Overcurrent fuse backup heater
F2B
*
Overcurrent fuse booster heater
F1T
Thermal fuse backup heater
F1U, F2U (A4P)
*
Fuse 5 A 250 V for digital I/O PCB
FU1 (A1P)
Fuse T 6.3 A 250 V for PCB
K1M, K2M
Contactor backup heater
K3M
*
Contactor booster heater
K5M
Safety contactor backup heater (only for
*9W)
K*R (A1P, A4P)
Relay on PCB
M1P
Main supply pump
M2P
#
Domestic hot water pump
M2S
#
2-way valve for cooling mode
M3S
(*) 3-way valve for floor heating/domestic hot
water
PC (A4P)
Power circuit
PHC1 (A4P)
*
Optocoupler input circuit
Q*DI
#
Earth leakage circuit breaker
Q1L
Thermal protector backup heater
Q2L
*
Thermal protector booster heater
R1H (A3P)
*
Humidity sensor
R1T (A1P)
Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
R1T (A2P)
Ambient sensor user interface
R1T (A3P)
*
Ambient sensor On/OFF thermostat
R2T (A1P)
Outlet backup heater thermistor
R2T (A3P)
*
External sensor (floor or ambient)
R3T
Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
R4T
Inlet water thermistor
R5T
(*) Domestic hot water thermistor
R6T
*
External indoor or outdoor ambient
thermistor
S1S
#
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
S2S
#
Electrical meter pulse input 1
S3S
#
Electrical meter pulse input 2
S4S
#
Safety thermostat
S6S~S9S
#
Digital power limitation inputs
SS1 (A4P)
*
Selector switch
TR1
Power supply transformer
CN1-2, X*A
X1H, X*Y
Connector
X*M
Terminal strip
*:
Optional
(*):
Optional for RHBH/X
#:
Field supply
Colours
BLK
Black
BRN
Brown
GRY
Grey
RED
Red
Translation of text on wiring diagram
English
Translation
(1) Main power connection
(1) Main power connection
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
Indoor unit supplied from outdoor Indoor unit supplied from outdoor
Normal kWh rate power supply
Normal kWh rate power supply
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
(2) Backup heater power supply
(2) Backup heater power supply
Only for ***
Only for ***
14 Technical data
Installer reference guide
88
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
English
Translation
(3) User interface
(3) User interface
Only for remote user interface
option
Only for remote user interface
option
Switch box
Switch box
(4) Domestic hot water tanks
(4) Domestic hot water tanks
3 wire type SPST
3 wire type SPST
Booster heater power supply
Booster heater power supply
Only for ***
Only for ***
Only for wall-mounted models
Only for wall-mounted models
Switch box
Switch box
(5) Ext. thermistor
(5) External thermistor
Switch box
Switch box
(6) Field supplied options
(6) Field supplied options
12 V DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
12 V DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
230 V AC supplied by PCB
230 V AC supplied by PCB
Continuous
Continuous current
DHW pump output
Domestic hot water pump output
DHW pump
Domestic hot water pump
Electrical meters
Electrical meters
For safety thermostat
For safety thermostat
Inrush
Inrush current
Max. load
Maximum load
Normally closed
Normally closed
Normally open
Normally open
Safety thermostat contact: 16 V
DC detection (voltage supplied
by PCB)
Safety thermostat contact:
16 V DC detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
SWB
Switch box
(7) Option PCBs
(7) Option PCBs
Alarm output
Alarm output
English
Translation
Changeover to ext. heat source
Changeover to external heat
source
If no bottom plate heater
If no bottom plate heater
Max. load
Maximum load
Min. load
Minimum load
Only for bottom plate heater
Only for bottom plate heater
Only for demand PCB option
Only for demand PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option
Only for solar pump station
Only for solar pump station
Options: bottom plate heater OR
On/OFF output
Options: bottom plate heater OR
On/OFF output
Options: ext. heat source output,
solar pump connection, alarm
output
Options: external heat source
output, solar pump connection,
alarm output
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power limitation digital inputs: 12
V DC / 12 mA detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
Power limitation digital inputs:
12 V DC / 12 mA detection
(voltage supplied by PCB)
Refer to operation manual
Refer to operation manual
Solar pump connection
Solar pump connection
Space C/H On/OFF output
Space cooling/heating On/OFF
output
Switch box
Switch box
To bottom plate heater
To bottom plate heater
(8) External On/OFF thermostats
and heat pump convector
(8) External On/OFF thermostats
and heat pump convector
Additional LWT zone
Additional leaving water
temperature zone
Main LWT zone
Main leaving water temperature
zone
Only for external sensor (floor/
ambient)
Only for external sensor (floor or
ambient)
Only for heat pump convector
Only for heat pump convector
Only for wired thermostat
Only for wired thermostat
Only for wireless thermostat
Only for wireless thermostat
14 Technical data
Installer reference guide
89
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
Electrical connection diagram
For more details, please check the unit wiring.
X1Y: 1-2
X1M: 1-2-3
A4P:Y2
X2M:29
2x0.75
X2M: 30-31
X5M: 3-4
1
1
F1B: L1-L2-L3
Q*L
X6M
X8M
5Gx2.5
230 V
X2M: 13-14
X9A (PCB A1P)
230 V
A4P: X4
X2M: 28
230 V
SPST:
X2M: 8-9-10
A4P: Y1
X2M: 28
A4P: Y3
X2M: 29
A4P: X1-X2
A3P: X1M: C-com-H
A4P: X1M: H-C-com
X2M: L-N
A3P: X1M: 1-3
R2T
230 V
X2M: 32-33
X11M: 3-4-5-6
X5M: 1-2
2x0.75
2x0.75
X2M: 34-35
X5M: 5-6
X5M: 7-8
X5M: 9-10
230 V
A8P: X801M: 1-5
230 V
A8P: X801M: 2-5
230 V
A8P: X801M: 3-5
230 V
A8P: X801M: 4-5
A4P: Y2
X2M: 29
Q*L
X5M
230 V
2way valve
F2B
X7M
3
3
3
4D090420 A
2
2
X1M: 1-2-3
230 V
230 V
230 V
230 V
230 V
2 core
3 core
5 or 3 core
normal kWh rate power supply for indoor unit: 230 V
unit preferential kWh rate power supply
400 V or 230 V + earth:
Only for preferential kWh rate power supply installation
Only for normal power supply installation
5 or 3 core
unit power supply: 400 V or 230 V + earth
Field supply
Indoor Unit
Outdoor unit
Standard part
Optional parts (*KHW*)
Power supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
Field supply
Safety thermostat
booster heater power supply (3 kW): 230 V + earth
backup heater power supply (3/6/9 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth
X1M: L1-L2-L3-N-earth
or L-N-earth
Only for *KBPHT*
& depending on model
Bottom plate heater
F2B: L-N + earth
or L-N + earth
On/OFF output
Cooling/heating
Changeover to
ext. heat source output
Solar input
Alarm output
2 core
3 core
main: X2M: 1-4
add: X2M: 1a-4
main: X2M: 1-2-3-4
add: X2M: 1a-2a-3-4
main: X2M: 1-2-4
add: X2M: 1a-2a-4
NC valve: X2M: 5-7
NO valve: X2M: 6-7
2 core
2 core
2 core
2 core
2 core
2 core
signal
5 core
3 core
4 or 3
core
Domestic hot
water tank
clixon
R5T - thermistor
water temperature
Q2L - clixon
booster heater
Booster heater
clixon
Only for *KHWSU*V3
Only for *KRP1AHTA
Only for *KSOLHWAV1
X4M: 1-2-earth
Power limitation
demand input 4
Power limitation
demand input 3
Power limitation
demand input 2
Power limitation
demand input 1
solar pump
4 core for H only operation
5 core for C/H operation
2 core for H only operation
3 core for C/H operation
communication
2 core
4 core
Notes:
- In case of signal cable: keep minimum distance to power cables > 5 cm
- Available heaters depending on model: see combination table
3way valve
M3S (when *KHW is installed)
selection domestic hot water-floor heating
Only for *KRUCBL*
A2P: P1-P2 user interface
A2P: P1-P2 user interface
Standard part
Optional part
External room thermostat / Heat pump convector
(main and/or additional zone)
Optional part
Only for
(heat pump convector)
Only for *KRTR
(wireless room thermostat)
Only for *KRTW
(wired room thermostat)
External sensor
(floor or ambient)
Only for *KRTETS
2 core
(3m included)
signal
Electricity meter
pulse input 2
Electricity meter
pulse input 1
Circulation pump
for DHW
M2S (*KHBX units)
for cooling mode
Ext. heat source (eg boiler)
BSK: 1-2 solar interlock
alarm indication
Cooling/heating
On/OFF output
2way valve
2 core
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
230 V
2 core
2 core
2 core
signal
2 core
2 core
2 core
Only for *KSR3PA option
Only for *KRP1HB* & *KSOLHWAV1
Field supply
external thermistor
(indoor or outdoor)
Only for KRCS01-1 or EKRSCA1
230 V
230 V
communication
2 core
14 Technical data
Installer reference guide
90
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
14.5
Drain pan necessity
4D078990
1. Refer to psychometric chart for more information.
2. If condensation is expected, installation of EKHBDPCA2 - drainpan kit must be considered.
Entering water temperature limit to prevent condensation
Entering water temperature [°C]
Entering water temperature [°C]
Dry bulb temperature [°C]
Relative humidity 40%
Relative humidity 60%
Relative humidity 80%
Example:
With ambient temperature of 25°C
and relative humidity of 40%.
If entering water temperature is
below 12°C, condensation on water
piping will happen.
Installer reference guide
91
RRLQ004~008CA + RHBH/X04+08CB
ROTEX HPSU low temperature Bi‑bloc
4P384979-1C – 2017.04
14.6
ESP curve: Indoor unit
Note: A flow error will occur when the minimum water flow rate is not
reached.
EHBH/X04=RHBH/X04
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
A (kPa)
B (l/min)
C
4D090624-1A
EHBH/X08=RHBH/X08
70
80
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
A (kPa)
B (l/min)
C
4D090624-1A
A
External static pressure
B
Water flow rate
C
Operation range
Operation area is extended to lower flow rates only in case the unit
operates with heat pump only. (Not in startup, no backup heater
operation, no defrost operation).
ESP=External static pressure [kPa] in the space heating/cooling
circuit.
Flow=Water flow through the unit in the space heating/cooling
circuit.
Notes:
▪ Selecting a flow outside the area of operation can cause damage
or malfunction of the unit. See also the minimum and maximum
allowed water flow range in the technical specifications.
▪ Water quality MUST be according to EN directive EC98/83EC.
15
Glossary
Dealer
Sales distributor for the product.
Authorized installer
Technical skilled person who is qualified to install the
product.
User
Person who is owner of the product and/or operates the
product.
Applicable legislation
All international, European, national and local directives,
laws, regulations and/or codes that are relevant and
applicable for a certain product or domain.
Service company
Qualified company which can perform or coordinate the
required service to the product.
Installation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to install, configure and maintain
it.
Operation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to operate it.
Maintenance instructions
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, which explains (if relevant) how to install,
configure,
operate
and/or
maintain
the
product
or
application.
Accessories
Labels, manuals, information sheets and equipment that are
delivered with the product and that need to be installed
according to the instructions in the accompanying
documentation.
Optional equipment
Equipment made or approved by ROTEX that can be
combined with the product according to the instructions in
the accompanying documentation.
Field supply
Equipment not made by ROTEX that can be combined with
the
product
according
to
the
instructions
in
the
accompanying documentation.
Field settings table
[6.8.2] = .... ID66F2
Applicable indoor units
*HBH04CB3V
*HVH04S18CB3V
*HBH08CB3V
*HVH08S18CB3V
*HBH11CB3V
*HVH11S18CB3V
*HBH16CB3V
*HVH16S18CB3V
*HBX04CB3V
*HVX04S18CB3V
*HBX08CB3V
*HVX08S18CB3V
*HBX11CB3V
*HVX11S18CB3V
*HBX16CB3V
*HVX16S18CB3V
*HBH08CB9W
*HVH08S26CB9W
*HBH11CB9W
*HVH11S26CB9W
*HBH16CB9W
*HVH16S26CB9W
*HBX08CB9W
*HVX08S26CB9W
*HBX11CB9W
*HVX11S26CB9W
*HBX16CB9W
*HVX16S26CB9W
Notes
(*1) *HB*
(*2) *HV*
(*3) *3V
(*4) *9W
(*5) *04/08*
(*6) *11/16*
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
└─ Preset values
└─ Room temperature
7.4.1.1
R/W
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
21°C
7.4.1.2
R/W
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
19°C
7.4.1.3
R/W
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
24°C
7.4.1.4
R/W
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
26°C
└─ LWT main
7.4.2.1
[8-09]
R/W
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
7.4.2.2
[8-0A]
R/W
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
33°C
7.4.2.3
[8-07]
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
7.4.2.4
[8-08]
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
7.4.2.5
R/W
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
7.4.2.6
R/W
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
-2°C
7.4.2.7
R/W
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
7.4.2.8
R/W
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
└─ Tank temperature
7.4.3.1
[6-0A]
R/W
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
7.4.3.2
[6-0B]
R/W
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
7.4.3.3
[6-0C]
R/W
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
└─ Quiet level
7.4.4
R/W
0: Level 1 (*6)
1: Level 2 (*5)
2: Level 3
└─ Electricity price
7.4.5.1
[C-0C]
[D-0C]
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
7.4.5.2
[C-0D]
[D-0D]
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
7.4.5.3
[C-0E]
[D-0E]
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
└─ Fuel price
7.4.6
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0,00~290/MBtu
8,0/kWh
└─ Set weather dependent
└─ Main
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.1.1
[1-00]
Set weather-dependent heating
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
7.7.1.1
[1-01]
Set weather-dependent heating
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
7.7.1.1
[1-02]
Set weather-dependent heating
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
[9-01]~[9-00]°C, step: 1°C
35°C
7.7.1.1
[1-03]
Set weather-dependent heating
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.1.2
[1-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
7.7.1.2
[1-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
R/W
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
7.7.1.2
[1-08]
Set weather-dependent cooling
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
7.7.1.2
[1-09]
Set weather-dependent cooling
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
└─ Additional
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.2.1
[0-00]
Set weather-dependent heating
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
7.7.2.1
[0-01]
Set weather-dependent heating
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
7.7.2.1
[0-02]
Set weather-dependent heating
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
7.7.2.1
[0-03]
Set weather-dependent heating
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.2.2
[0-04]
Set weather-dependent cooling
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
7.7.2.2
[0-05]
Set weather-dependent cooling
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
7.7.2.2
[0-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
R/W
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
7.7.2.2
[0-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
Installer settings
└─ System layout
└─ Standard
A.2.1.1
[E-00]
R/O
0~5
0: LT split
A.2.1.2
[E-01]
R/O
0: 8
1: 16
A.2.1.3
[E-02]
R/O
0: Type 1
1: Type 2
A.2.1.4
[E-03]
R/O
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
Indoor software type
Backup heater steps
High
Medium
Low
Unit type
Compressor type
Comfort (cooling)
Eco (cooling)
Storage comfort
Storage eco
Reheat
Comfort (heating)
Eco (heating)
Comfort (cooling)
Eco (cooling)
Comfort (heating)
Eco (heating)
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Comfort (heating)
Eco (heating)
Comfort (cooling)
Eco (cooling)
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
A.2.1.5
[5-0D]
R/W
0: 1P,(1/2)
1: 1P,(1/1+2) (*3)
2: 3P,(1/2)
3: 3P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2) (*4)
A.2.1.6
[D-01]
R/W
0: No
1: Open tariff
2: Closed tariff
3: Thermostat
A.2.1.7
[C-07]
R/W
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
A.2.1.8
[7-02]
R/W
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
A.2.1.9
[F-0D]
R/W
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
A.2.1.A
[E-04]
R/O
0: No
1: Yes
A.2.1.B
R/W
0: At unit
1: In room
└─ Options
A.2.2.1
[E-05]
R/W
0: No (*1)
1: Yes (*2)
A.2.2.3
[E-07]
R/W
0~6
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
A.2.2.4
[C-05]
R/W
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
A.2.2.5
[C-06]
R/W
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
A.2.2.6.1
[C-02]
Digital I/O PCB
Ext. backup heat src
R/W
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: -
3: -
A.2.2.6.2
[D-07]
Digital I/O PCB
Solar kit
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.2.2.6.3
[C-09]
Digital I/O PCB
Alarm output
R/W
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
A.2.2.6.4
[F-04]
Digital I/O PCB
Bottom plate heater
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.2.2.7
[D-04]
R/W
0: No
1: Pwr consmp ctrl
A.2.2.8
[D-08]
R/W
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
A.2.2.9
[D-09]
R/W
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
A.2.2.A
[D-02]
R/W
0~4
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. shunt
A.2.2.B
[C-08]
R/W
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
└─ Capacities
A.2.3.1
[6-02]
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW (*1)
0kW (*2)
A.2.3.2
[6-03]
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
A.2.3.3
[6-04]
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW (*3)
6kW (*4)
A.2.3.6
[6-07]
R/W
0~200W, step: 10W
0W
└─ Space operation
└─ LWT settings
└────────────────── Main
A.3.1.1.1
R/W
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
A.3.1.1.2.1
[9-01]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
A.3.1.1.2.2
[9-00]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
A.3.1.1.2.3
[9-03]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.3.1.1.2.4
[9-02]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
A.3.1.1.5
[8-05]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.3.1.1.6.1
[F-0B]
Shut-off valve
Thermo On/OFF
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.3.1.1.6.2
[F-0C]
Shut-off valve
Cooling
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.3.1.1.7
[9-0B]
R/W
0: Quick
1: Slow
└────────────────── Additional
A.3.1.2.1
R/W
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
Forced off contact
Emitter type
LWT setpoint mode
Booster heater
BUH: step 1
BUH: step 2
Bottom plate heater
LWT setpoint mode
Modulated LWT
Contact type add.
Demand PCB
External kWh meter 1
External kWh meter 2
DHW pump
External sensor
Pump operation mode
Power saving possible
User interface location
DHW operation
DHW tank type
Contact type main
BUH type
Unit control method
Number of LWT zones
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
A.3.1.2.2.1
[9-05]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
A.3.1.2.2.2
[9-06]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
A.3.1.2.2.3
[9-07]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.3.1.2.2.4
[9-08]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
└────────────────── Delta T source
A.3.1.3.1
[9-09]
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.3.1.3.2
[9-0A]
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
└─ Room thermostat
A.3.2.1.1
[3-07]
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
12°C
A.3.2.1.2
[3-06]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
A.3.2.1.3
[3-09]
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
A.3.2.1.4
[3-08]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
A.3.2.2
[2-0A]
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
A.3.2.3
[2-09]
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
A.3.2.4
R/W
0: 0,5 °C
1: 1 °C
└─ Operation range
14~35°C, step: 1°C
25°C (*5)
14~35°C, step: 1°C
35°C (*6)
A.3.3.2
[F-01]
R/W
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
└─ Domestic hot water (DHW)
└─ Type
A.4.1
[6-0D]
R/W
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
└─ Disinfection
A.4.4.1
[2-01]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.4.4.2
[2-00]
R/W
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
A.4.4.3
[2-02]
R/W
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
A.4.4.4
[2-03]
R/W
[E-07]≠1 : 55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
A.4.4.5
[2-04]
R/W
[E-07]≠1 : 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1 : 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
└─ Maximum setpoint
A.4.5
[6-0E]
R/W
[E-07]≠1 : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
[E-07]=1 : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
└─ SP mode
A.4.6
R/W
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
└─ Weather dependent curve
A.4.7
[0-0B]
Weather-dependent curve
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
R/W
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
A.4.7
[0-0C]
Weather-dependent curve
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
R/W
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
A.4.7
[0-0D]
Weather-dependent curve
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
A.4.7
[0-0E]
Weather-dependent curve
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
└─ Heat sources
└─ Backup heater
A.5.1.1
[4-00]
R/W
0~2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A.5.1.3
[4-07]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.5.1.4
[5-01]
R/W
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
└─ System operation
└─ Auto restart
A.6.1
[3-00]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
└─ Preferential kWh rate
A.6.2.1
[D-00]
R/W
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
A.6.2.2
[D-05]
R/W
0: Forced off
1: As normal
└─ Pwr consumpt. Control
A.6.3.1
[4-08]
R/W
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
Allowed heaters
Forced pump OFF
Mode
Operation mode
Enable BUH step 2
Equilibrium temp.
Disinfection
Operation day
Start time
Temperature target
Duration
Room temp. step
A.3.3.1
[4-02]
Space heating OFF temp
R/W
Space cooling On temp
Heating
Cooling
Room temp. offset
Ext. room sensor offset
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
A.6.3.2
[4-09]
R/W
0: Current
1: Power
A.6.3.3
[5-05]
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.6.3.4
[5-09]
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.6.3.5.1
[5-05]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.6.3.5.2
[5-06]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.6.3.5.3
[5-07]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.6.3.5.4
[5-08]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.6.3.6.1
[5-09]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.6.3.6.2
[5-0A]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.6.3.6.3
[5-0B]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.6.3.6.4
[5-0C]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.6.3.7
[4-01]
R/W
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
└─ Averaging time
A.6.4
[1-0A]
R/W
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
└─ Ext amb. sensor offset
A.6.5
[2-0B]
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
└─ Boiler efficiency
A.6.A
[7-05]
R/W
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
└─ Emergency
A.6.C
R/W
0: Manual
1: Automatic
└─ Overview settings
A.8
[0-00]
R/W
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
A.8
[0-01]
R/W
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
A.8
[0-02]
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
A.8
[0-03]
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
A.8
[0-04]
R/W
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
A.8
[0-05]
R/W
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
A.8
[0-06]
R/W
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
A.8
[0-07]
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
A.8
[0-0B]
R/W
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
A.8
[0-0C]
R/W
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
A.8
[0-0D]
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
A.8
[0-0E]
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
A.8
[1-00]
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
A.8
[1-01]
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
A.8
[1-02]
R/W
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
A.8
[1-03]
R/W
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
A.8
[1-04]
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A.8
[1-05]
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A.8
[1-06]
R/W
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
A.8
[1-07]
R/W
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
A.8
[1-08]
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
A.8
[1-09]
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
A.8
[1-0A]
R/W
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
A.8
[2-00]
R/W
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
A.8
[2-01]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
When should the disinfection function be executed?
Should the disinfection function be executed?
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
What is the averaging time for the outdoor temp?
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
Weather dependent cooling of the main leaving water temperature zone.
Weather dependent cooling of the additional leaving water temperature zone
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
kW value
Priority
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
Type
Amp. value
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
A.8
[2-02]
R/W
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
A.8
[2-03]
R/W
[E-07]≠1 : 55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
A.8
[2-04]
R/W
[E-07]≠1: 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1: 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
A.8
[2-05]
R/W
4~16°C, step: 1°C
12°C
A.8
[2-06]
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A.8
[2-09]
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
A.8
[2-0A]
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
A.8
[2-0B]
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
A.8
[3-00]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[3-01]
0
A.8
[3-02]
1
A.8
[3-03]
4
A.8
[3-04]
2
A.8
[3-05]
1
A.8
[3-06]
R/W
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
A.8
[3-07]
R/W
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
12°C
A.8
[3-08]
R/W
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
A.8
[3-09]
R/W
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
A.8
[4-00]
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
A.8
[4-01]
R/W
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
14~35°C, step: 1°C
25°C (*5)
14~35°C, step: 1°C
35°C (*6)
A.8
[4-03]
R/W
0: Limited
1: No limit
2: Most optimum
3: Optimum
4: Only legionella
A.8
[4-04]
2
A.8
[4-05]
0
A.8
[4-06]
0/1
A.8
[4-07]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[4-08]
R/W
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
A.8
[4-09]
R/W
0: Current
1: Power
A.8
[4-0A]
0
A.8
[4-0B]
R/W
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
1°C
A.8
[4-0D]
R/W
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
3°C
A.8
[5-00]
R/W
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
A.8
[5-01]
R/W
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
A.8
[5-02]
R/W
0: Disabled [E-07]≠1
1: Enabled [E-07]=1
A.8
[5-03]
R/W
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
A.8
[5-04]
R/W
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
A.8
[5-05]
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.8
[5-06]
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.8
[5-07]
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.8
[5-08]
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
A.8
[5-09]
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.8
[5-0A]
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.8
[5-0B]
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.8
[5-0C]
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
A.8
[5-0D]
R/W
0: 1P,(1/2)
1: 1P,(1/1+2) (*3)
2: 3P,(1/2)
3: 3P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2) (*4)
A.8
[5-0E]
1
A.8
[6-00]
R/W
2~20°C, step: 1°C
2°C
A.8
[6-01]
R/W
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
The temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature.
What is the requested limit for DI2?
What is the requested limit for DI3?
What is the requested limit for DI4?
What type of backup heater installation is used?
--
The temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature.
Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature.
What is the requested limit for DI1?
What is the requested limit for DI2?
What is the requested limit for DI3?
What is the requested limit for DI4?
What is the requested limit for DI1?
Automatic cooling/heating changeover hysteresis.
Automatic cooling/heating changeover offset.
Is backup heater operation allowed above equilibrium temperature during space
heating operation?
What is the equilibrium temperature for the building?
Space heating priority.
Space heating priority temperature.
--
-- (Do not change this value)
Enable the second step of the backup heater?
Which power limitation mode is required on the system?
Which power limitation type is required?
--
A.8
[4-02]
Below which outdoor temperature is heating allowed?
R/W
Operation permission of the booster heater.
--
What is the maximum desired room temperature in heating?
What is the mimimum desired room temperature in heating?
What is the maximum desired room temperature in cooling?
What is the minimum desired room temperature in cooling?
What is the BUH operation mode?
Which electric heater has priority?
Is auto restart of the unit allowed?
--
--
--
--
--
How long must the tank temperature be maintained?
Room antifrost temperature
Room frost protection
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
What is the required offset on the measured outdoor temp.?
When should the disinfection function start?
What is the disinfection target temperature?
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
A.8
[6-02]
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW (*1)
0kW (*2)
A.8
[6-03]
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
A.8
[6-04]
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW (*3)
6kW (*4)
A.8
[6-05]
0
A.8
[6-06]
0
A.8
[6-07]
R/W
0~200W, step: 10W
0W
A.8
[6-08]
R/W
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
A.8
[6-09]
0
A.8
[6-0A]
R/W
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
A.8
[6-0B]
R/W
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
A.8
[6-0C]
R/W
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
A.8
[6-0D]
R/W
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
A.8
[6-0E]
R/W
[E-07]≠1 : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
[E-07]=1 : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
A.8
[7-00]
R/W
0~4°C, step: 1°C
0°C
A.8
[7-01]
R/W
2~40°C, step: 1°C
2°C
A.8
[7-02]
R/W
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
A.8
[7-03]
2,5
A.8
[7-04]
0
A.8
[7-05]
R/W
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
A.8
[8-00]
1 min
A.8
[8-01]
R/W
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
A.8
[8-02]
R/W
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
0,5 hour [E-07]=1
3 hour [E-07]≠1
A.8
[8-03]
R/W
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
A.8
[8-04]
R/W
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
A.8
[8-05]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[8-06]
R/W
0~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
A.8
[8-07]
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
A.8
[8-08]
R/W
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
A.8
[8-09]
R/W
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
A.8
[8-0A]
R/W
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
33°C
A.8
[8-0B]
13
A.8
[8-0C]
10
A.8
[8-0D]
16
A.8
[9-00]
R/W
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
A.8
[9-01]
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
A.8
[9-02]
R/W
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
A.8
[9-03]
R/W
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.8
[9-04]
R/W
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
A.8
[9-05]
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
A.8
[9-06]
R/W
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
A.8
[9-07]
R/W
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.8
[9-08]
R/W
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
A.8
[9-09]
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.8
[9-0A]
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.8
[9-0B]
R/W
0: Quick
1: Slow
A.8
[9-0C]
R/W
1~6°C, step: 0,5°C
1 °C
A.8
[9-0D]
R/W
0~8, step:1
0 : 100%
1~4 : 80~50%
5~8 : 80~50%
6
A.8
[9-0E]
6
A.8
[A-00]
0
A.8
[A-01]
0 (*5)
3 (*6)
--
--
--
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
What is the desired delta T in heating?
What is the desired delta T in cooling?
What emitter type is connected to the main LWT zone?
Room temperature hysteresis.
Pump speed limitation
What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature.
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
What is the desired eco main LWT in heating?
--
--
--
What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
Additional running time for the maximum running time.
Allow modulation of the LWT to control the room temp?
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation.
What is the desired comfort main LWT in cooling?
What is the desired eco main LWT in cooling?
What is the desired comfort main LWT in heating?
--
Boiler efficiency
--
Maximum running time for domestic hot water operation.
Anti-recycling time.
Booster heater delay timer.
What is the desired DHW production type?
What is the maximum temperature setpoint?
Domestic hot water booster heater overshoot temperature.
Domestic hot water booster heater hysteresis.
How many leaving water temperature zones are there?
--
What is the capacity of the bottom plate heater?
What is the hysteresis to be used in reheat mode?
--
What is the desired comfort storage temperature?
What is the desired eco storage temperature?
What is the desired reheat temperature?
What is the capacity of the booster heater?
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 1?
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 2?
--
--
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
A.8
[A-02]
0 (*5)
1 (*6)
A.8
[A-03]
0
A.8
[A-04]
0
A.8
[B-00]
0
A.8
[B-01]
0
A.8
[B-02]
0
A.8
[B-03]
0
A.8
[B-04]
0
A.8
[C-00]
R/W
0: Solar priority
1: Heat pump priority
A.8
[C-01]
0
A.8
[C-02]
R/W
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: -
3: -
A.8
[C-03]
R/W
-25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
A.8
[C-04]
R/W
2~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
A.8
[C-05]
R/W
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
A.8
[C-06]
R/W
0: -
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
A.8
[C-07]
R/W
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
A.8
[C-08]
R/W
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
A.8
[C-09]
R/W
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
A.8
[C-0A]
0
A.8
[C-0C]
R/W
0~7
0
A.8
[C-0D]
R/W
0~7
0
A.8
[C-0E]
R/W
0~7
0
A.8
[D-00]
R/W
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
A.8
[D-01]
R/W
0: No
1: Open tariff
2: Closed tariff
3: Thermostat
A.8
[D-02]
R/W
0~4
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. shunt
A.8
[D-03]
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -2 to 2°C)
2: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -2 to 2°C)
3: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -4 to 4°C)
4: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -4 to 4°C)
A.8
[D-04]
R/W
0: No
1: Pwr consmp ctrl
A.8
[D-05]
R/W
0: Forced off
1: As normal
A.8
[D-07]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[D-08]
R/W
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
A.8
[D-09]
R/W
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
A.8
[D-0A]
0
A.8
[D-0B]
2
A.8
[D-0C]
R/W
0~49
0
A.8
[D-0D]
R/W
0~49
0
A.8
[D-0E]
R/W
0~49
0
A.8
[E-00]
R/O
0~5
0: LT split
A.8
[E-01]
R/O
0: 8
1: 16
A.8
[E-02]
R/O
0: Type 1
1: Type 2
A.8
[E-03]
R/O
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
A.8
[E-04]
R/O
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[E-05]
R/W
0: No (*1)
1: Yes (*2)
A.8
[E-06]
R/O
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[E-07]
R/W
0~6
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
A.8
[E-08]
R/W
0: Disabled (*6)
1: Enabled (*5)
Forced off contact type
What is the number of backup heater steps?
Is the power saving function available on the outdoor unit?
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
Is a DHW tank installed in the system?
What kind of DHW tank is installed?
Power saving function for outdoor unit.
What is the high electricity price (Do not use)
What is the medium electricity price (Do not use)
What is the low electricity price (Do not use)
Which type of unit is installed?
Which type of compressor is installed?
What is the indoor unit software type?
Is the pump allowed to run if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
Is a solar kit connected?
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
--
--
Low electricity price decimal (Do not use)
Which heaters are permitted if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
Which type of DHW pump is installed?
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C.
Is a demand PCB connected?
What is the unit control method in space operation?
Which type of external sensor is installed?
What is the required alarm output contact type?
--
High electricity price decimal (Do not use)
Medium electricity price decimal (Do not use)
--
Is an external backup heat source connected?
Bivalent activation temperature.
Bivalent hysteresis temperature.
What is the thermo request contact type for the main zone?
What is the thermo request contact type for the add. zone?
--
--
--
--
--
Domestic heating water priority.
--
--
--
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
Field settings table
Installer setting at variance with
default value
A.8
[E-09]
0
A.8
[E-0A]
0
A.8
[E-0B]
0
A.8
[E-0C]
0
A.8
[E-0D]
--
0
A.8
[F-00]
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A.8
[F-01]
R/W
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
A.8
[F-02]
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
A.8
[F-03]
R/W
2~5°C, step: 1°C
5°C
A.8
[F-04]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[F-05]
0
A.8
[F-06]
0
A.8
[F-09]
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A.8
[F-0A]
0
A.8
[F-0B]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[F-0C]
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
A.8
[F-0D]
R/W
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
--
Close shut-off valve during thermo OFF?
Close shut-off valve during cooling?
What is the pump operation mode?
--
Bottom plate heater ON temperature.
Bottom plate heater hysteresis.
Is a bottom plate heater connected?
--
--
Pump operation during flow abnormality.
--
--
--
Pump operation allowed outside range.
Above which outdoor temperature is cooling allowed?
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
4P383508-1B - 2017.04